JP2017104702A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can notify the outside of the illegal replacement of a main control device.SOLUTION: A door detection sensor 24 is connected to both of a main control device 131 and a display control device 111, and when a front surface door 12 is opened or closed with respect to a case body 11, a door opening/closing command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111. Also, in the display control device 111, when the door opening/closing command is not received from the main control device 131 after a prescribed time after the opening/closing operation of the front surface door 12 is confirmed, it is notified to the outside that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced. Thus, even when the main control device 131 is replaced with an illegal one, since notification can be made when the front surface door 12 is opened or closed next, the outside can be made to recognize that there is the possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine.

  For example, as a kind of gaming machine, a medal is inserted and a start lever is operated to rotate a rotating cylinder with a plurality of symbols, and then a stop button is operated to stop the rotating cylinder. There is known a slot machine that gives a predetermined number of medals when a combination of symbols displayed by stopping the spinning cylinder is a predetermined combination.

The slot machine has an outer shape formed by a substantially box-shaped casing (frame body) in which a rotating drum and the like are installed, and a front door (door body) that opens and closes the front surface of the casing. Inside the slot machine, a main control device that performs main control of the game is installed, and medals to be given to the player are stored. Therefore, as one of the purposes to prevent the main control device that performs the main control of the game from being illegally exchanged or the medal being taken out illegally, the front door and the housing are locked with a dedicated key. It has become.
Furthermore, a door detection sensor for detecting that the front door is opened with respect to the housing is provided inside the slot machine, and when the door detection sensor detects that the front door is opened, that fact Some of them notify the outside that the front door is open. By notifying the outside that the front door is open, unauthorized actions such as replacement of the main control device and taking out of medals can be suppressed.

JP 2001-37948 A

  However, in a slot machine provided with a door detection sensor that detects that the front door has been opened with respect to the housing, it is possible to notify the outside that the front door has been opened. If the main control device is illegally replaced with a main control device that does not notify even if the door detection sensor detects that the front door has been opened, then it will notify even if the front door is opened. There was a problem that was not made.

  In particular, when the illegally exchanged main control device performs illegal control that forcibly generates a special gaming state (so-called jackpot) that gives a player a large gaming value, Since the medals were paid out, there was a problem that the hall suffered great damage.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can notify the outside that the main control device has been illegally replaced.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is a game provided in a space formed by a frame, a door that opens and closes the front of the frame, and the door and the frame. Main control means for performing the main control of the above, and sub-control means for performing control according to instructions from the main control means provided in the space, both the main control means and the sub-control means The main control means is connected to the frame body and detects the opening / closing operation of the door body with respect to the frame body. The main control means opens and closes the door body with respect to the frame body based on the detection result of the detection means. A main judgment means for judging whether or not the door body has been opened / closed by the main judgment means, and a door opening / closing signal based on the opening / closing operation of the door body being controlled by the sub-control Transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means Is determined based on the detection result of the detection means whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body, and the sub-judgment means has determined that the door body has been opened / closed. When the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means cannot be received in the state, the first output means for outputting the fact to the outside.

  The opening / closing operation of the door body detected by the detecting means includes an opening operation for opening the door body with respect to the frame body, a closing operation for closing the door body with respect to the frame body, and the opening operation. It includes at least one of a series of operations in which a closing operation is performed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the main control means and the sub-control means store change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. A comparison means for comparing the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means with the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means, respectively. When the comparison result by the comparison means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means Is output to the outside.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, the comparison means and the second output means may be included in the main control means or the sub control means. Further, a control means different from the main control means or the sub control means may have the comparison means and the second output means.

  The change information that changes as the door body closes is, for example, the number of times the door body is closed, or a value that changes irregularly as the door body closes (for example, 111 The next value is a value whose numerical value changes in the order of 3 and the next value is 255 or a random value).

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the sub control means opens the door body when the sub judgment means judges that the door body has been opened. While storing information, when the sub-determination means determines that the door body has been closed, the sub-opening / closing information storage means stores the closing information of the door body, and the opening information is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means. Is stored, and a third output means for outputting the fact to the outside when the game is executed is provided.

  Note that the opening or closing operation determined by the sub-determination means is determined when the detection means detects that the door body has actually opened or closed, for example, the detection result by the detection means, When the state changes from off to on to off, or from on to off to on, it may be determined that the operation has been opened or closed.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the frame body is provided with a first locking member that locks the door body. Are closed to the frame body and positioned on the inner side of the frame body relative to the first locking member, and closed to the frame body and closer to the door body side than the first locking member. A rear end portion that is positioned, and a groove portion that is provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and in which the first locking member is inscribed, and the groove portion and the first locking member are locked. A second locking member configured to be urged and movable from a state in which the groove portion and the first locking member are locked is provided, and the detection means is provided with the second locking member on the first locking member. The position is different from the position where the locking member is locked, and is provided within the range in which the second locking member moves.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the main control means is mounted on a first board and included in a first board box, The sub-control means is mounted on a second substrate different from the first substrate, and is included in a second substrate box different from the first substrate box.

  The output to the outside by the first to third output means is, for example, a sound output by a sound output means such as a speaker provided in a gaming machine, a display output by a display means such as a lamp provided in the gaming machine, a game For example, output of a signal to an external device provided outside the machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the detection means for detecting the opening / closing operation of the door relative to the frame is connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and the main control means Based on this, it is determined by the main determination means whether or not the door has been opened and closed with respect to the frame. When it is determined by the main judging means that the door body is opened / closed, a door opening / closing signal based on the door body being opened / closed is transmitted to the sub-control means by the transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub-control means, the sub-determination means determines whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame based on the detection result of the detection means, and the door body is opened / closed by the sub-determination means. If the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means cannot be received in the state determined as described above, the fact is output to the outside by the first output means.

  Therefore, it is determined by the main judgment means of the main control means and the sub judgment means of the sub control means whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body. In the sub control means, the door body is opened and closed by the sub judgment means. When the door opening / closing signal cannot be received from the main control means in the state determined to have been operated, the first output means can output that the door body has been opened / closed.

  Therefore, when the main control means is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the door opening / closing signal is not transmitted from the main control means, so the door body is opened or closed by the unauthorized person, and the sub-judging means When it is determined that the door body has been opened and closed, there is an effect that the first output means can output that the main control means may have been replaced.

  Further, since an outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the first output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the main control means and the sub-control means change as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. Change information storage means for storing information is provided, and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means are To be compared. If the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means, the fact is indicated to the second output means. Is output by. Therefore, when the main control means is exchanged for an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the change information stored in the respective change information storage means does not correspond, so that the output by the second output means can be performed. effective.

  Moreover, since the outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the second output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced, There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  Further, since the change information stored in the change information storage means cannot be known without examining the contents of the change information storage means, it is often necessary to know the change information stored in the change information storage means. It will take a long time. Therefore, since it takes a lot of time to prevent the output of the second output means from being performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means with an unauthorized one.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the door body opening information when it is determined by the sub-determination means that the door body has been opened, When the sub-determination means determines that the door has been closed, the door closure information is stored in the sub-open / close information storage means, and the opening information is stored in the sub-open / close information storage means. Is output to the outside by the third output means.

  Here, for example, if the fraudster knows that it is a gaming machine that outputs to the outside that the main control means has been exchanged at the timing of opening and closing the door body, An action is considered in which a game is executed without closing the door body and a special game state is forcibly generated.

  However, when the door body is opened and not closed, the opening information is stored in the auxiliary opening / closing information storage means, so that the door remains open even if a game is executed by an unauthorized person. The fact that the game is being executed can be output by the third output means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed that there is a possibility that the main control means has been replaced by an unauthorized person.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the first locking member provided on the frame and the second provided on the door. The locking member is locked and the door is closed with respect to the frame. The second locking member is closed to the frame body and has a distal end located on the inner side of the frame body than the first locking member, and the door from the first locking member in a state closed to the frame body. It has a rear end portion located on the body side and a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and inscribed by the first locking member, and biased to a state of locking with the first locking member Has been. That is, when the door body is opened, the first locking member and the second locking member cannot be released unless the second locking member is moved. In addition, since the detection means is provided in a position different from the position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member and within the range in which the second locking member moves, the detection means It can be detected that the second locking member has started to move. Therefore, since the detection means detects that the second locking member that operates without fail when the door is opened, it is possible to reliably detect that the door is opened.

Also, when the door body is closed from the opened state, the second locking member is detected by the detecting means, and then the first locking member and the second locking member are locked. Therefore, even if the supply of power is cut off and the main control means is illegally replaced, when the power is supplied and the door is closed to play a game, the output is made by the first or second output means. . Accordingly, it is possible to reliably output that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one, and to make it possible to recognize the possibility that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one by the output. There is.
According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the main control means is mounted on the first board and included in the first board box. The sub-control means is mounted on a second substrate different from the first substrate and is included in a second substrate box different from the first substrate box. Therefore, since the main control means and the sub control means are installed in different board boxes, it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

It is a perspective view of the state which closed the front door of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine with a front door opened. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is the figure which showed roughly a part of structure which latches a front door with respect to a housing | casing. It is an expanded view of the belt-shaped belt which comprises each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning mode and a medal payout number. FIG. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric structure of the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU of the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process performed by MPU of the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of a power failure performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the door opening / closing command setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the winning probability setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the reel control processing performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the rotation start process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the payment determination process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the medal payout process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the bonus game process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the display timer interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command reception process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drive data output process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the door opening / closing monitoring process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed schematically a part of structure which latches the front door of 2nd Embodiment with respect to a housing | casing. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric constitution of the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a graph showing the relationship between the door detection sensor and time It is the figure which showed the connection part of the front door and housing | casing of the slot machine of a modification.

  In the following, an embodiment in the case of application to a spinning-reel type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. First, the structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the structure for locking the front door 12 to the housing 11. FIG. 5 is a development view of the belt-like belts constituting the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the number of medals paid out.

  First, the appearance and structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 includes a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left plate 11d, and a right plate 11e formed in a wooden plate shape, and the adjacent plates 11a to 11e are fixed by a fixing means such as adhesion. Thus, it is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened as a whole. In addition, each board 11a-11e may be comprised with a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel other than being comprised with a wooden panel, or it is comprised by forming in the box shape integral with a synthetic resin material or a metal material. May be. The casing 11 configured as described above is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

  A front door 12 as a front open / close door is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the left side plate 11d of the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a and 25b (see FIG. 3), and the support shafts 25a and 25b are provided with tapered shaft portions protruding upward. ing. On the other hand, the front door 12 is provided with a support fitting (not shown) provided with an insertion hole into which the shaft portion of the support shaft 25a, 25b is inserted corresponding to each support shaft 25a, 25b. Therefore, by placing the support fittings above the respective support shafts 25a and 25b and lowering the front door 12, the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support fittings. . Thereby, the front door 12 is supported so as to be rotatable about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the both support shafts 25a and 25b with respect to the housing 11, and the front opening side of the housing 11 is opened by the rotation. It can be closed or closed.

  A key cylinder 20 that locks the front door 12 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12. The key cylinder 20 is integrated with a locking device, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 20. Therefore, by releasing the locked state with the key cylinder 20, the front door 12 can be rotated and opened.

  A game panel 30 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The gaming panel 30 is formed so that three vertically long left display windows 31L, a middle display window 31M, and a right display window 31R are arranged side by side. The display windows 31L, 31M, 31R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. The display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R may be combined into a single display window.

  From each of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, a reel unit 41 (see FIG. 2) having a left reel 42L, a middle reel 42M, and a right reel 42R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape) is configured to be visible. Yes. The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may be configured as at least an endless belt, and are not limited to a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R correspond to the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is visible through the corresponding display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. Further, when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R.

  Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R includes a stepping motor 61L for the reel 42L (see FIG. 7), a stepping motor 61M for the middle reel 42M (see FIG. 7), and a stepping motor 61R for the reel 42R (see FIG. 7). ), And the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, that is, independently of each other.

  Each of the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; the same applies hereinafter). The rotational positions of the stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R, that is, the rotational positions of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are controlled.

  In addition, the game panel 30 is provided with a total of five combination lines, with three display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R connected to each other, three in parallel in the horizontal direction and two in diagonal directions. . Of course, the maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5, and the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (reverse V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be validated.

  Corresponding to these combination lines, effective line display sections 32, 33, and 34 are provided on the left side when viewed from the front of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. The first effective line display unit 32 is notified by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (center line) of the combination lines is activated. When the upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are activated, the second effective line display unit 33 is displayed and notified by lighting or the like. The third effective line display unit 34 is notified by lighting or the like when a pair of diagonal lines (downward right line and upward right line) of the combination lines is activated. A winning is awarded when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line, and a predetermined medal payout process, a transition process to a specific game, and the like are executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the design drawn on each belt of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, on each belt of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a plurality of, specifically, 21 symbols are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize which symbols are visible from the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R based on the number of pulses from when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 (see FIG. 7) is output, It is possible to perform a control such that the symbol is visible from the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R.

  Of the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R is mainly determined by the vertical lengths of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. Is limited to a predetermined number. In this embodiment, three reels are provided. For this reason, when all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player.

  Each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. Although numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to the respective reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, these are given for convenience of explanation, and are not actually attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. . However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  The symbols include “Replay” symbol (for example, left belt 20th), “Bell” symbol (for example, left belt 19th), “Youth” symbol (for example, left belt 18th), “7” symbol (for example, (Left belt 17th), “Cherry” design (eg, left belt 13th), “Chance” design (eg, left belt 12th), “Watermelon” design (eg, left belt 9th), “Reach” design ( For example, there are nine types: the 6th left belt) and the “Lucky” symbol (for example, 1st left belt). As shown in FIG. 5, the number of various symbols and the arrangement order are completely different in the belts wound around the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

  Each reel 42L, 42M, 42R of the reel unit 41 is an example of variable display means for variably displaying identification information, and constitutes a main display unit. However, the variable display means may have a configuration other than this as long as the symbol is variably displayed in the circumferential direction. For example, other mechanical reel configurations such as a type in which the belt is rotated instead of rotating may be used. In addition to the mechanical reel configuration, an electric display such as a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix display may be used. A device for variably displaying the identification information may be provided, and in this case, it is possible to give abundant variations in the display form.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the payout number regarding each symbol when winning is explained. As shown in FIG. 6, the small role winning in which medals are paid out includes watermelon winning, bell winning, and cherry winning. When stopped alongside the “Watermelon” symbol, “Watermelon” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol from the left on the active line, 15 medals are paid out as a watermelon prize, “Bell” symbol from the left, “Bell” on the active line In the case of stopping alongside the symbol and the “bell” symbol, eleven medals are paid out as a bell prize. When the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the active line, two medals are paid out as a cherry prize. That is, in the case of a cherry winning, any symbol that stops on the active line of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R may be any symbol. Therefore, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the position where the plurality of effective lines of the left reel 42L overlap (specifically, the upper stage or the lower stage), a cherry winning is established on each active line, and the overlapping effective The medal is paid out by multiplying the number of lines. As a result, in this embodiment, four medals are paid out.

  Further, there is a BB winning as a state transition winning in which the gaming state shifts. When the “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, the game state shifts to the BB game where the gaming state is the special gaming state as a BB winning. However, even if the “7” symbol stops along the left, middle and right on the active line, no medal is paid out. That is, when the combination of the “7” symbols is established on the active line, only the BB game is entered. In other words, it can be said that the “7” symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the BB game.

  Furthermore, when the “replay” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “replay” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, a re-game win is awarded. When the re-game winning is established, the medal payout and the state transition are not performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals.

  In addition, only when the gaming state is an RB game, which will be described later, when stopped alongside the “Replay” symbol, “Replay” symbol, “Chance” symbol from the left on the active line, and from the left on the active line When the “replay” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “lucky” symbol are stopped alongside, 15 medals are paid out as a JAC prize.

  In other cases, that is, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L does not stop on the active line and the combination of the symbols described above does not stop on the active line, the medal payout, the transition of the gaming state, etc. Not done at all. That is, the “chance” symbol and “lucky” symbol of the left reel 42L, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, the “young” symbol and the “reach” symbol of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R Not involved at all. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. As described above, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a “bell” symbol and a non-privileged symbol irrelevant to winning such as a “young” symbol, for example. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB symbol combination is a symbol BB winning combination, that is, a combination of “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 30, a start lever 71 is provided that is operated to start (change) all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R all at once (not necessarily simultaneously). It has been. The start lever 71 constitutes a fluctuation start means that is operated to start rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, that is, to start the symbol fluctuation display. The start lever 71 is a lever that is pushed by a hand (the direction in which it is pushed is not limited) when the player starts a game (game), and automatically returns to the original position after the hand is released by a built-in spring. To do. When the start lever 52 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 71, button-like stop switches 72, 73, 74 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R are provided. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 is arranged directly below the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R corresponding to the reels 42L, 42M, 42R to be stopped. The stop switches 72, 73, 74 constitute fluctuation stop means that are operated to stop fluctuation display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R.

  Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 42L starts rotating, and is stopped by lighting a lamp (not shown) during such a state. It is notified that the operation is possible, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a medal slot 75 for inserting medals as game media for playing games. The medal slot 75 constitutes a receiving port that can receive game media. Further, if attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 75 involves an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 75 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

  A button-like return switch 76 is provided below the medal slot 75. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 is jammed in the selector 83 (see FIG. 2). When the return switch 76 is pressed, the selector 83 is mechanically interlocked. The medal jammed in the selector 83 is returned from the medal discharge port 17.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a button-like first credit insertion switch 77 for inserting three virtual medals credited as game media at a time. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 77, a second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79 formed in a button shape smaller than the switch 77 are provided. The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Each of the credit insertion switches 77 to 79, together with the medal insertion slot 75, constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, if the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, each credit insertion switch 77 to 79 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. It can also be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

  The first credit insertion switch 77 has a built-in lamp as a light emitting member (not shown) to urge that the maximum number of medals that can be inserted per game (three) has not been reached. The lamp is turned on when the switch operation of the first credit insertion switch 77 is valid and prompts the operation of the switch 77. However, when there is no credited virtual medal or three medals have already been inserted. It is turned off under the circumstances. Here, instead of the above-described lighting, the player may make it easier to understand the prompt for medal insertion by blinking.

  A button-like changeover switch 80 is provided on the left side of the start lever 71. The change-over switch 80 is configured to be a toggle type that is turned on when pressed once, turned off when pressed again, and turned on / off every time the pressing operation is performed. The changeover switch 80 is operated to change the handling format of inserted medals inserted into the medal slot 75 more than necessary, or acquired medals returned to the player as a result of a predetermined game.

  When the change-over switch 80 is in the ON state, the “credit mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) and winning medals are stored and stored as credit medals. " When the changeover switch 80 is in the OFF state, the “direct mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals and winning medals are paid out as actual medals. If there is a credit medal when the credit mode is switched to the direct mode, the corresponding credit medal is paid out as an actual medal. Thus, the player can execute the game in a format according to his / her preference by switching between the credit mode and the direct mode. The changeover switch 80 constitutes a changeover operation means for changing over the input value and game value handling formats. Further, if paying attention to the function of paying out a credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the changeover switch 80 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game value. In addition to being configured to switch between the “credit mode” and the “direct mode” by operating the changeover switch 80, the virtual medal stored and stored is paid out when the changeover switch 80 is operated by always setting the “credit mode”. It may be made to function as only a settlement switch.

  Below the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R of the game panel 30, a remaining number display unit 35 that displays the number of medals that are activated and stored in the credit mode, and a special game state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus are displayed. At this time, for example, a game number display unit 36 for displaying the number of remaining games and an acquired number display unit 37 for displaying the number of acquired medals are provided. Although these display parts 35-37 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  Here, a procedure for betting medals will be described. In both the direct mode and the credit mode, a bet is placed when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 75 at the start of the game.

  That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the first effective line display section 32 is turned on, and the corresponding center line becomes the effective line, and the second medal is the medal insertion slot. When the number 75 is inserted, the second effective line display section 33 is turned on, and a total of three combination lines including an upper line and a lower line corresponding to the second effective line display section 33 become effective lines, respectively, and the third medal is a medal. When it is inserted into the insertion port 75, the third effective line display unit 34 is further turned on, and a total of five combination lines including a pair of diagonal lines corresponding thereto become effective lines.

  When four or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, the surplus medals exceeding three medals are discharged by the selector 83 (see FIG. 2) by the selector 83 (see FIG. 2) if the current mode is the direct mode. 2) and returned to the medal tray 18 from the medal discharge port 17. On the other hand, in the credit mode, it is stored inside the slot machine, and the number of stored sheets is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35. An upper limit number is determined for the number of stored sheets (for example, 50), and when a medal exceeding the number is inserted, it is returned from the medal discharge port 17 to the medal tray 18.

  In addition, when a game is played in the credit mode and the number of stored items is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35, the virtual number is displayed even when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed. A medal is inserted and a bet is placed.

  When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pressed, the numerical value displayed on the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by one as a virtual medal is inserted, and the first effective line display section 32 is displayed. Illuminates and the center line becomes the active line. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pressed, two numerical values displayed on the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented as two virtual medals are inserted, and the first valid line display unit 32 and The second effective line display section 33 is lit and a total of three combination lines become effective lines. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, three numerical values displayed on the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented as three virtual medals are inserted, and all the effective line display units 32 to 32 are decremented. 34 lights up and a total of five combination lines become effective lines.

  In addition, when the virtual medal to be inserted when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed is not stored, for example, when the display of the remaining number display unit 35 is 2, the first For example, when the credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, all the values in the remaining number display section 35 are decremented to 0, and a bet is made for the amount of virtual medals that can be inserted.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has a pair of left and right lamps 13 that light up or blink as the game progresses, and that emit various sound effects as the game progresses or inform the player of the game state. A speaker 14 and an auxiliary display unit 15 for providing various information to the player are provided. The lamp 13 is composed of an upper lamp 13a formed in a horizontally long shape along the upper side of the slot machine 10 and a throwing abnormality lamp 13b disposed on the lower left side of the upper lamp 13a.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 15 is configured by a liquid crystal display for the purpose of diversifying display contents and increasing the display effect. However, other displays such as a dot matrix display may be used. Good. The auxiliary display unit 15 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is caused by the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 15. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 15, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, and a display control device 111 for driving the auxiliary display unit 15 are provided. The shapes, positions, numbers, etc. of the lamps 13 and the speakers 14 are not limited to those described above.

  A lower plate 16 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 18. In addition, an ashtray 19 that can be reversed to the lower side on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 18.

  Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a state in which the front door 12 is opened from the state of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11 in a state in which the front door 12 is removed. The same parts as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the locking device provided on the front door 12 will be described. As described above, the front door 12 is provided with the key cylinder 20 as an unlocking operation unit, and the key cylinder 20 is integrated with the locking device, and the key cylinder 20 is operated by a predetermined key operation. The locked state is configured to be released.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a locking device is provided on the back side of the front door 12 on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis. The locking device extends vertically and is fixed to the front door 12, a key cylinder 20 provided so as to extend from the upper part of the base frame to the front of the front door 12, and moves vertically with respect to the base frame. It is provided with a long interlocking rod 21 assembled as possible. And only the key cylinder 20 is provided in the state which protruded ahead of the front door 12 among the locking devices. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the thin upper portion of the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 20 having a short overall length can be employed. In the present embodiment, Omlock (trade name) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 20.

  The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking saddle 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower saddle fittings 22 having a bowl shape. When the front door 12 is closed with respect to the casing 11, the saddle fitting 22 is supported on the casing 11 side. (See FIG. 3) and locked. In addition, the urging member 22 is provided with an urging member such as a coil spring for urging to the side maintaining the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the saddle fitting 22 is moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state with the support fitting 23 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

  Next, the selector 83 provided on the front door 12 will be described. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 described above are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by the selector 83 provided on the back surface of the front door 12. The selector 83 is provided with a medal passage switching member (not shown) to be described later, and the medal passage direction is switched between the discharge passage 82 side and the storage passage 81 side according to the state of the medal passage switching member. It is supposed to be. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is guided to the hopper device 91 housed in the housing 11. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 75a (see FIG. 7). On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 82 is guided to the medal tray 18 (refer to FIG. 1) from the medal discharge port 17 (refer to FIG. 1) provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player. Is done. The opening 94 is an opening through which medals paid out from the hopper device 91 pass, and the medals are paid out to the medal tray 18 via the discharge passage 82.

  Next, the internal structure of the housing 11 will be described. A hopper device 91 as a payout means for giving a medal to a player is provided below the inside of the housing 11. The hopper device 91 includes a storage tank 92 that stores medals and a payout device 93 that pays out medals to the player. The payout device 93 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 94 provided in the central right part of the discharge passage 82, and through the discharge passage 82, the medal tray 18 (FIG. (See 1). Further, a reserve tank 95 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 91 in order to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 92. A guide plate 96 for discharging medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95 is provided inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 96 is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 95.

  A power supply box 121 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 91. The power supply box 121 includes a power switch 122, a reset switch 123, a setting key insertion hole 124, and the like. The power switch 122 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 131 (see FIG. 7).

  The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the power shut-off is stored, but if the power switch 122 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 123, the backup data is reset. It has become so. If the reset switch 123 is pressed while the power switch 122 is on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 124 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the setting state (winning probability setting process) of the slot machine 10 can be changed from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” by the hole manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and rotating it. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 131 is attached to the back plate 11 c of the housing 11 above the reel unit 41. The main control device 131 is an MPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, time counting and synchronization. A main board including a clock circuit used in the case of planning, etc., and the main board is housed in a board box (first board box) as an encapsulation means made of a transparent resin material or the like. Yes. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other so as not to be opened by a sealing unit as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  Further, a door opening sensor 26 for detecting that the front door 12 is opened is attached to the top plate 11 a of the housing 11. The output of the door opening sensor 26 is turned on when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, and the output is turned off when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11. The door detection sensor 26 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111.

  Further, on the left side portion of the housing 11, support metal fittings 23 that are engaged with the metal fittings 22 provided on the front door 12 are provided up and down. The front door 12 is locked to the housing 11. Further, a door detection sensor 24 is provided below the support fitting 23 located above the support fitting 23. The door detection sensor 24 is a sensor for detecting a state in which the metal fitting 22 has moved when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11. The door detection sensor 24 is configured by a photo sensor, and when the metal fitting 22 moves, the optical path is blocked by the metal fitting 22 so that the output state changes. The positional relationship between the door detection sensor 24 and the metal fitting 22 and the operation of the metal fitting 22 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 4A is a view showing a state in which the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11 and the hook metal 22 is locked to the support metal 23. First, the shape of the metal fitting 22 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the metal fitting 22 is a portion located on the housing 11 side in a state where the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11, and a distal end portion that is the distal end side of the metal fitting 22. 22a, a rear end portion 22b which is a portion located on the front door 12 side and is a rear end side of the metal fitting 22, a connection portion 22c which connects the rear end portion 22b and the front end portion 22a at the lower end, and the connection It is comprised by the groove part 22d enclosed by the part 22c, the front-end | tip part 22a, and the rear-end part 22b.

  Further, in a state where the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11, the support fitting 23 is abutted against the inner side surface of the groove portion 22 d, and the saddle fitting 22 is locked to the support fitting 23. Therefore, when opening the front door 12 from the housing 11, it is necessary to open the front door 12 after moving the metal fitting 22 downward to release the locking with the support member 23. As described above, the metal fitting 22 can be moved by inserting a key into the key cylinder 20 and rotating (for example, rotating clockwise).

  As described above, the metal fittings 22 are provided at two locations on the front door 12 (see FIG. 2). When the upper and lower metal fittings 22 are manually moved downward, the other metal fitting 22 does not move in conjunction with it, and only the metal fitting 22 that has been manually moved moves. It is configured as follows. That is, only when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, the interlocking rod 21 operates and the upper and lower metal fittings 22 move in conjunction with each other. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of forcibly opening the front door 12 by forcibly moving the metal fitting 22 by a thin plate member (for example, a cell or the like).

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating a state in which a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated. As described above, when a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is operated to rotate, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward in conjunction with the rotation of the key, and the saddle fitting 22 is interlocked with the operation of the interlocking rod 21. Moving. When the saddle fitting 22 is moved (that is, when the opening operation of the front door 12 is started), the distal end portion 22a blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 24, and it is detected that the saddle fitting 22 has moved. . That is, the door detection sensor 24 is disposed within the movement range of the metal fitting 22.

  When the saddle fitting 22 is in the state shown in FIG. 4B, the locking of the groove 22d with the support fitting 23 is released, and the front door 12 can be rotated. When the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, the front door 12 is opened, so that the metal fittings 22 are simultaneously moved and come out of the optical path of the door detection sensor 24. As a result, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is not shielded by the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22, and the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes. That is, when the front door 12 is opened, the output of the door detection sensor 24 changes from off (state of FIG. 4 (a)) to on (state of FIG. 4 (b)), and then off (front face). The door 12 is opened).

  When the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 is released with the front door 12 opened, the interlocking rod 21 is moved upward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) and interlocked with the upward movement of the interlocking rod 21. Then, the metal fitting 22 moves upward, and the metal fitting 22 returns to the posture shown in FIG.

  Further, when the front door 12 is closed and the front door 12 is turned to the housing 11 side, the metal fitting 22 moves simultaneously with the front door 12 and the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 is supported. It contacts the metal fitting 23. And if the front door 12 is pushed further, the metal fitting 22 will move below. When the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the front end 22a of the saddle fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23, the saddle fitting 22 moves upward by the biasing force of the spring, and the groove 22d abuts on the support fitting 23 (FIG. 4). (State (a)), the closing operation of the front door 12 is completed. In addition, since the metal fitting 22 also moves when the front door 12 is closed, the output state of the door detection sensor 24 is also changed from the off state (the front door 12 is opened) to the on state (FIG. 4B). ), And then changes to OFF (state shown in FIG. 4A).

  As described above, the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes in the same manner both when the front door 12 is opened and when the front door 12 is closed. In the present embodiment, when the output of the door detection sensor 24 is switched from OFF to ON to OFF, it is determined that the front door 12 has been opened or closed (ie, opened or closed). Further, even when only the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 is performed without rotating the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves, so that the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes and the opening or closing operation is performed. To be judged. In the present embodiment, if the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, the door detection sensor 24 continues to be on, so the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 cannot be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the housing 11, but the door detection sensor 24 may be attached to the front door 12. When the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12, the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is completed, and the output of the door detection sensor 24 is switched from on to off when the hand is released from the key. When the hand is released, it is determined that the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is completed.

  In addition, regardless of the position where the door detection sensor 24 is attached, a cover that covers the locking device (such as the metal fitting 22 and the interlocking rod 21) of the front door 12 is provided and fixed to a state where the metal fitting 22 has been moved by an unauthorized person. It is preferable to prevent fraud such as being performed. Further, when the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12, if the door detection sensor 24 is attached within the cover, an illegal act such as the installation of a member that shields the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is suppressed. Can do.

  Here, with reference to Fig.33 (a), the change of the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the state change of the front door 12 are demonstrated. FIG. 33A is a graph showing the relationship between the change in the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the time when the state of the front door 12 changes.

  Before the time t1 shown in FIG. 33A, the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. Therefore, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is off. When the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves and blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 (time t <b> 1). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned on at time t1.

  During the period from time t1 to time t2, the state in which the key cylinder 20 is being rotated is continued. Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 by the metal fitting 22 is used. Is blocked (time t2). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned off at time t2.

  During the period from time t2 to time t3, the state where the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 is continued. After that, when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, as described above, The tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 contacts the support metal 23, and the metal fitting 22 moves downward, and the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is shielded by the metal fitting 22 (time t3). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned on at time t3.

  Between time t3 and time t4, the front door 12 is pushed into the housing 11, and then the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23. Then, the metal fitting 22 moves upward and the shielding of the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is released (time t4). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned off at time t4.

  As described above, the output of the door detection sensor 24 changes from off to on and further off when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 and when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11. To do.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main controller 131 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 151 which is arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 (see FIG. 2), the MPU 151 is connected to a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. Has been. The main control device 131 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 131, there are a start detection sensor 71a for detecting the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, 74a for individually detecting the operations of the stop switches 72, 73, 74, and a medal slot. An inserted medal detection sensor 75a for detecting medals inserted from 75, credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, 79a for individually detecting operations of the respective credit insertion switches 77, 78, 79, and an adjustment for detecting an operation of the adjustment switch 80. Detection sensor 80 a, reel index sensor 55 that individually detects the rotational position (origin position) of each reel 42, payout detection sensor 91 a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 91, and reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset switch 123 123a, set in the setting key insertion hole 124 A setting key detection sensor 124a for detecting that a key is inserted and turned ON, and a door detection sensor 24 for detecting a metal fitting 22 that operates (moves) when the front door 12 opens and closes with respect to the housing 11. Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 26 for detecting that the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the MPU 151 via the input / output port 155. It is like that. Note that the door detection sensor 24 and the door opening sensor 26 are also connected to the display control device 111.

  The inserted medal detection sensor 75a is actually composed of a plurality of sensors. That is, the storage passage 81 (see FIG. 2) from the medal slot 75 (see FIG. 1) to the hopper device 91 (see FIG. 2) is configured so that medals can pass in one row. In addition, a first sensor (not shown) is provided in the storage passage 81, and a second sensor (not shown) and a third sensor (not shown) are arranged on the downstream side more than the medal width. They are provided in close proximity (adjacent to the extent that a state where the same medal is simultaneously detected at least at one time) is provided, and the inserted medal detection sensor 75a is constituted by each of the first to third sensors.

  The main control device 131 monitors the time from the first sensor to the second sensor, and if the elapsed time exceeds a predetermined time, the main control device 131 considers that there has been a medal clogging or fraud and makes an error. If an error occurs, an error notification is performed and an operation by the player until the error is canceled is invalidated.

  The main controller 131 also monitors the order in which the second sensor and the third sensor are turned on / off, both the second and third sensors are off, only the second sensor is on, and both the second and third sensors are both on. The medal is normally taken in only when the order is on, only the third sensor is on, both the second and third sensors are off, and the time for shifting to each on / off switching is within a predetermined time. Judgment, otherwise it is an error. The reason for this is to prevent a fraud in which the medal is reciprocated near the inserted medal detection sensor 75a and misidentified as a medal inserted in addition to the clogging of the medal in the storage passage 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Further, a power supply device 161 is connected to the input side of the main control device 131 via an input / output port 155. The power supply device 161 includes a power supply unit 161 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 131, a power failure monitoring circuit 161 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 161b is for monitoring the power cutoff state and generating a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also at the time of power cutoff by the power switch 122. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 161a, and determines that the power supply is shut off when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 151 and the input / output port 155, and the MPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. Although details will be described later, the power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 111.

  The power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 131 even when the output voltage is reduced to less than 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main controller 131 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 131, each of the effective line display units 32, 33, 34, the credit display unit 35, the remaining acquired number display unit 36, the acquired number display unit 37, and the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is rotated. Stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R, a medal passage switching solenoid 83 provided in the selector 84, a hopper device 91, a display control device 111, an external concentration terminal plate 171 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. The output port 155 is connected.

  The display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and includes a substrate on which MPU, ROM, RAM, and the like for driving these are integrated. Then, after receiving a signal from the main control device 131, the display control device 111 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15. Therefore, the display control device 111 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 131 that is a main base that manages and manages games. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the display control apparatus 111 controls the various display parts 32-37.

  The MPU 151 described above stores various control programs executed by the MPU 151 and a ROM 152 storing fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 152. In addition to the RAM 153 for securing the area, as is well known, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 152 and the RAM 153 constitute a main memory as storage means. For example, the programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 22 are described above as a part of the control program. Stored in the ROM 152.

  The RAM 153 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 even after the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 153 stores a memory for temporarily storing various data, a setting information storage area 153a used when setting a winning probability, a game state such as a BB game, and various data used during a BB game. BB information storage area 153b for playing, game information storage area 153c for storing various data used in each game, power failure flag 153d, open / close counter 153e, previous door open / close flag 153f, current door open / close A flag 153g, a transmission command storage area 153h, and a backup area are provided.

  The power failure flag 153d is a flag indicating whether or not a power failure has occurred. The power failure flag 153d is turned on in step S102 of the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 9) executed when a power failure occurs, and is executed for the first time after the occurrence of the power failure. This is turned off in the process of S513 of the main process (see FIG. 13).

  The opening / closing counter 153e is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is performed in S407 of the door opening / closing command setting process (see FIG. 12). Each time is detected, 1 is added. The number of times stored in the open / close counter 153e is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S407 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  The previous and current door opening / closing flags 153f and 153g are flags indicating whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f indicates the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12. The current door open / close flag 153g indicates the current open / close state of the front door 12. The current door opening / closing flag 153g is turned on or off in the processing of S403 and S404 of the door opening / closing command setting processing (see FIG. 12), and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f is the processing of S410 of the door opening / closing command setting processing. The value of the flag 153g is stored as it is.

  The transmission command storage area 153h is an area for storing a command to be transmitted to the display control device 111, and is configured in a known ring buffer format in this embodiment. The commands stored in the transmission command storage area 153h are read in the stored order and transmitted to the display control device 111 when the process of S211 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed.

  The backup area stores the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shut down by operating the power switch 122 (see FIG. 2); the same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 122. The same applies hereinafter), the slot machine 10 can return to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. It is like that. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 11), and the restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process (see FIG. 13) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 161b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 151 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing as flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 111 of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 111. In the description of FIG. 8, the detailed description of the portions described in the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 7 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 that is arithmetic processing means. Yes.

  The MPU 181 is executed by the MPU 181, a signal latch circuit 182 that latches a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main controller 131, a latch circuit 184 that latches a clock signal generated from the clock circuit 183 every 1 msec, and the MPU 181. ROM 185 storing various control programs and fixed value data for driving upper lamp 13 and the like, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in ROM 185 A RAM 186 for securing is connected. Note that a one-chip microcomputer in which the above-described ROM 185, RAM 186, signal latch circuit 182 and clock circuit 183 are incorporated in the MPU may be used.

  The MPU 181 is connected to a power supply device 161, a door detection sensor 24, a door opening sensor 26, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, and an auxiliary display unit 15 through an input / output port 187. The power supply device 161 is configured such that a power failure signal is input when the drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 131, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 via the input / output port 187. . Hereinafter, the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect unit.

  The RAM 186 includes a received command storage area 186a, an interrupt timer counter 186b, a command check timer 186c, a door open / close command reception flag 186d, a previous door open / close flag 186e, a current door open / close flag 186f, and an open / close counter 186g. And are provided.

  The received command recording area 186a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 131, and stores the command received in the process of S2201 of the command receiving process (see FIG. 25).

  The interrupt timer counter 186b is a counter that sets the timing for executing the drive data output process. The interrupt timer counter 186b is incremented by 1 in the process of S2002 of the display timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the drive data output process (see FIG. 27). It is cleared by the process of S2409.

  The command check timer 186c is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the opening operation of the front door 12 is detected, and the value 10 is set in the processing of S2607 of the door opening / closing monitoring processing (see FIG. 29), and the processing of S2611 1 is subtracted.

  The door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is a flag indicating whether or not a door opening / closing command has been received from the main controller 131. When the door opening / closing command is received in the command reception processing (see FIG. 25), the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2204. In step S2614 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), the process is turned off.

  The previous and current door opening / closing flags 186e and 186f are flags indicating whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 186e indicates the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12. The current door open / close flag 186f indicates the current open / close state of the front door 12. The current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned on or off in the processing of S2603 and S2604 in the door opening / closing monitoring processing (see FIG. 29), and the previous door opening / closing flag 186e is processed in S2609 of the door opening / closing monitoring processing. The value of is stored as it is.

  The opening / closing counter 186g is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11. The opening / closing counter 186g is incremented by 1 in the process of S2608 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29). The number of times stored in the open / close counter 186g is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S2608 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the MPU 151 in the main controller 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 22. The processing of the MPU 151 is roughly divided into a main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal. For convenience of explanation, the NMI interrupt process and the timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The NMI interruption process is executed when the main controller 131 receives a power failure signal generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 161b of the power supply device 161 through the NMI terminal when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the NMI interrupt process is executed, the process being executed (including the interrupt process) is stopped.

  In the NMI interrupt processing, first, the data of the used register provided in the MPU 151 is saved in the backup area provided in the RAM 153 (S101). Subsequently, the power failure flag 153d is turned on (S102), the data saved in the backup area of the RAM 153 is restored to the use register of the MPU 151 again (S103), and this process is terminated. If the power failure flag can be turned on without destroying the data in the used register of the MPU 151, the save and restore processing to the backup area can be omitted.

  The MPU 181 of the display control apparatus 111 executes the same process as the NMI interrupt process described above, but a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The timer interrupt process is executed by causing the MPU 151 of the main control device 131 to generate a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  When the timer interrupt process is executed, first, a register saving process is executed (S201). In the register saving process of S201, the values of all registers in the MPU 151 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 153.

  In the process of S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag 153d is turned on. If the power failure flag is turned on (S202: Yes), the power failure process is executed (S203), and the power failure flag 153d is turned off. If yes, the process proceeds to S204 without executing the power failure process. Hereinafter, the power failure process (S203) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the power failure process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. Since the power failure process is performed immediately after the register saving process in the timer interrupt process, other interrupt processes can be executed without interruption. Therefore, for example, during the process of transmitting various commands, during the process of reading the switch state (on / off), the process at the time of power failure is not executed by interrupting each process. It is no longer necessary to create a power failure processing program that also takes into account This simplifies the processing program for power failure processing and reduces the program capacity. This also applies to a processing program for power recovery processing described later.

  When the process at the time of power failure is executed, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed (S301). If the transmission has not been completed (S301: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 to terminate the command transmission. In this way, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed at the initial stage of the power failure process, the transmission process is prioritized when the transmission is incomplete, and the power failure process is executed after the unit command transmission process is completed. By doing so, it is no longer necessary to construct a power failure processing program that takes into account that power failure processing is executed during command transmission. As a result, the power failure processing program can be simplified and the capacity of the ROM 152 can be reduced.

  If the command transmission is completed in the process of S301 (S301: Yes), the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 151 is stored in the backup area in the RAM 153 (S302). Thereafter, a RAM determination value, which will be described later, is cleared as a stop process, and the output state of the output port in the input / output port 155 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (S303). Further, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area (S304). The RAM determination value is specifically a 2's complement of the checksum at the work area address of the RAM 153. By storing the RAM determination value in the backup area, the checksum of the RAM 153 becomes zero. By setting the checksum of the RAM 153 to 0, subsequent RAM access is prohibited (S305).

  After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 153 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. If the power outage signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered.

  The power supply unit 161a of the power supply device 161 holds the output of the stabilization voltage (5 volts) used as the drive voltage for the control system for a time sufficient to execute the above-described NMI interrupt processing and power failure processing. It is comprised so that. In the present embodiment, the drive voltage is continuously output for 30 msec.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process will be described. In the process of S204, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is executed (S204). In the process of S205, an interrupt end declaration process for giving an interrupt permission to the MPU 151 itself is executed (S205). In the process of S206, in order to rotate the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors 61L to 61R, which are the respective rotary drive motors, is executed (S206). In the process of S207, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring the state of various sensors (see FIG. 7) connected to the input / output port 155 is executed (S207). In the process of S208, a door opening / closing command setting process is executed (S208). The door opening / closing command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing door opening / closing command setting processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131. When the door opening / closing command setting process is executed in S208 of the timer interrupt process, a value input from the door detection sensor 24 is acquired (S401), and the door detection sensor 24 is turned on based on the acquired value. It is confirmed whether it is (S402). The value input from the door detection sensor 24 is, for example, a voltage value. If the value is 5 V or more, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is shielded by the metal fitting 22, and the door detection sensor 24 is determined to be on. If the value is less than 5 V, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is not shielded by the metal fitting 22, and it is determined that the door detection sensor 24 is off.

  If the door detection sensor 24 is on in the process of S402 (S402: Yes), the current door open / close flag 135g for storing the open / closed state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S403), and the door is detected. If the sensor 24 is in an off state (S402: No), the current door opening / closing flag 135g is turned off (S404), and the process proceeds to S405.

  In the process of S405, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening / closing flag 135f that stores the previous open / closed state of the front door 12 is ON (S405), and if the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is OFF (S405: No). ), The process proceeds to S410. As described above, when the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF. Therefore, when the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is off, the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 has not been started (already opened or closed), so the processing of S406 to S409 is not executed. The process proceeds to S410.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is turned on in S405 (S405: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is started. Next, the current door opening / closing flag 135g is turned on. It is confirmed whether or not (S406). As described above, when the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF, so that the current door open / close flag 135g is ON (S406). : Yes) Since the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is still continued, the process proceeds to S410 without executing the processes in S407 to S409.

  On the other hand, if the current door opening / closing flag 135g is OFF in the processing of S406 (S406: No), the front door 12 is opened or closed with respect to the housing 11, and therefore the value of the opening / closing counter 135e is set. 1 is added (S407), and a door opening / closing command (a signal including a door opening / closing signal and an opening / closing signal) is generated based on the value of the opening / closing counter 135e (S408).

  Then, the door opening / closing command created in the process of S408 is stored in a predetermined area of the transmission command storage area 135h (S409), and the process proceeds to S410. In this embodiment, the door opening / closing command stored in the transmission command storage area 135h is composed of 2 bytes, and the first byte indicates that the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11. Information is stored, and information indicating the number of times the front door 12 has been opened and closed is stored in the second byte. Therefore, the display control device 111 can recognize that the front door 12 has been opened and closed and the number of times that the front door 12 has been opened and closed.

  In the process of S410, when the door open / close command setting process is executed next, the value of the current door open / close flag 135g is stored in the previous door open / close flag 135f in order to confirm the open / closed state of the front door 12 (S410). This process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the processing after S209 of the timer interrupt processing will be described. In the process of S209, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is executed (S209). In the process of S210, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 171 is executed (S210). In the process of S211, a command output process for transmitting a command or the like to the display control device 111 is executed (S211). In the process of S212, a segment data setting process for setting the segment data displayed on the remaining number display unit 35, the game number display unit 36, and the acquired number display unit 37 is executed (S212). In the process of S213, the segment data display process which supplies the segment data set by the segment data setting process to each display part 35-37, and displays a corresponding number, a symbol, etc. is performed (S213). In the process of S214, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 155 is executed (S214). In the process of S215, a register restoration process is executed to restore the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous process of S201 to the corresponding register in the MPU 151 (S215). Thereafter, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed (S216), and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The main process is a process executed after the power is turned on, and is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or turning on the power switch 122.

  When the main process is executed, first, as an initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 151 and an interrupt mode for permitting the interrupt process is set. Thereafter, a register group in the MPU 151 and an I / O device are set. Etc., various settings are made (S501).

  When the initialization process is completed in the process of S501, it is confirmed whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 124 and is turned ON (S502). More specifically, it is determined whether an ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 124a. If the setting key is turned on (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and all data stored in the RAM 153 is cleared as a forced RAM clear process (S503), and the winning probability setting is performed. Processing is executed (S504), and then normal processing is executed.

  Here, the winning probability setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a winning probability setting process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The winning probability setting process is a process (S504) that is executed when the operator inserts a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and performs an ON operation. The winning probability setting process is a process for setting whether to execute internal processing based on the six-stage winning probability from “setting 1” to “setting 6” provided in the slot machine 10.

  When the winning probability setting process is executed, first, the next timer interruption is permitted (S601), the current setting value is read (S602), and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 35 based on the read setting value. (S603). However, in the process immediately after the setting key is inserted and turned ON, the data in the RAM 153 is cleared by the previous forced RAM clear process, so the set value displayed on the credit display unit 35 is “1”. is there.

  When the set value is displayed on the credit display unit 35, it is confirmed whether or not the start lever 71 is operated (S604). If the start lever 71 is not operated (S604: No), the reset switch 123 is operated. It is confirmed whether or not (S605). If the reset switch 123 is not operated in the process of S605 (S605: No), the process returns to S603 as it is, and if the reset switch 123 is operated (S605: Yes), the set value is updated by 1 ( S606), the process returns to S603. That is, in the process of S606, each time the reset switch 123 is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 35. When the reset switch 123 is operated when the set value is “6”, the set value is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the start lever 71 is operated in the process of S604 (S604: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the setting key is continuously turned on (S607). If the setting key has been turned on continuously, the process waits as it is (S607: Yes). If the setting key has been turned on (S607: No), the next timer interrupt is prohibited (S607: No). S608). Thereafter, the current set value is saved (S609), data other than the set value stored in the RAM 153 is cleared (S610), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the main process will be described. When the setting key is not inserted in the process of S502 (S502: No), the power recovery process shown in S506 and thereafter is performed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is shut off. Therefore, in the power recovery process, it is necessary to first check whether the data in the RAM 153 is normal.

  Therefore, in the process of S506, it is confirmed whether or not the set value is normal (S506). Specifically, when the set value is any one of 1 to 6, it is determined to be normal, and when it is 0 or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal in the process of S506 (S506: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag 153d is turned on (S507). If the power failure flag is turned on (S507: Yes) Further, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (S508). Specifically, the value of the checksum in the RAM 153 is checked to check whether the value is normal, that is, whether the value of the checksum including the RAM determination value is 0. If the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the data in the RAM 153 is normal.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the RAM determination value is normal (S508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S509, and the stack pointer value stored in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 151. The stack state is restored to the state before the power is shut off (S509). Next, a power recovery command for transmitting the power recovery process is transmitted to the display control device 111 (S510), the game state is stopped and the automatic settlement setting storage process is performed (S511), and various sensors such as the start detection sensor 71a are executed. Is initialized (S512). After the above processing is completed, the power failure flag is turned off (S513), and the processing returns to the address before the power is shut off. Specifically, the process returns to the timer interrupt process described above, and the watchdog timer clear process (S204) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S506 to S508, either is No, that is, the set value is abnormal (S506: No), the power failure flag that is turned on when the power is shut off is not turned on (S507: No), or When the RAM determination value is abnormal (S508: No), there is a high possibility that the data in the RAM 153 has been destroyed. In such a case, the operation prohibiting process shown in S514 to S516 is executed.

  As the operation prohibition process, first, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited (S514), all output ports in the input / output port 155 are cleared (S515), and all actuators connected to the input / output port 155 are turned off. Control to the state. Thereafter, an error notification process for notifying the occurrence of an error to the hall manager or the like using the upper lamp 13 or the like is executed (S516). This operation prohibition state is maintained until the above-described winning probability setting process is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the normal process is executed, the next timer interruption is permitted (S701), and the pre-start process for enabling the game is executed (S702). In the pre-start process of S702, the setting state of stop and automatic checkout is stored in the RAM 153 and waits until the display control device 111 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 111 and the like is completed, the game management process shown in S703 and thereafter is executed.

  In the process of S703, data stored in the game information storage area 153c of the RAM 153 (for example, a random number used in the previous game) is cleared (S703), and then a start waiting process is executed (S704). In the start waiting process of S704, it is confirmed whether or not a re-game winning is established in the previous game. If a re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and an insertion completion command is set to end the start waiting process.

  Here, the insertion completion command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp the completion of the automatic insertion. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 35. That is, when a re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

  If the re-game winning is not established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result of the sensor monitoring process (S207) of the timer interruption process, and an abnormality occurs. If the error occurs, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Although details will be described later, such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 123 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 80 has been operated. If the settlement switch 80 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal And set the checkout command.

  Here, the settlement command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the credited virtual medal is being returned. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 80 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal insertion or credit insertion switch 77 to 79 has been operated. A medal insertion process for setting an effective line is performed, and an insertion command is set to end the start waiting process. Here, the insertion command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that a betting operation has been performed.

  After completion of the start waiting process in S704, it is confirmed whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number (3 in the present embodiment) (S705). If the bet number of medals has reached a specified number, (S705: Yes), it is confirmed whether the start lever 71 is operated and a start command is generated (S706). When the number of bets on medals has not reached the specified number in the process of S705 (S705: No), or when the start command is not generated in the process of S706 (S706: No), the process of waiting for start in S704 Referring back to FIG. 4, the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  If a start command is generated in the processing of S706 (S706: Yes), the medal path switching solenoid 83 is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet reception (S707), and a start command is set (S708). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that a start command has been generated.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening / closing flag 153g is on (S709). If the current door opening / closing flag 153g is off (S709: No), then the door opening sensor 26 is on. If the door opening sensor 26 is also off (S710: No), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is not rotated, and the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, the process proceeds to S712.

  On the other hand, when the door opening / closing flag 153g is turned on or the door opening sensor 26 is turned on (S709: Yes or S710: Yes), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is rotated. Or, since the game has been executed with the front door 12 opened, an error notification setting process is executed (S711), and the process returns to S703. The error notification setting process of S711 is a process of setting a notification command for notifying the display control device 111 that the game has been started with the front door 12 being opened.

  In the processes after S712, the lottery process (S712), the reel control process (S713), the medal payout process (S714), and the bonus game process (S715) are executed in sequence, the process returns to S703, and the processes of S703 to S715 are repeated. Do.

  In the normal process, various commands such as the input completion command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 111. The command transmission to the display control device 111 is performed in the command output process S210 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  Here, a case where a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and a game is started while being rotated, or a case where a game is started while the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 will be described. . As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that the main controller 131 has been replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, an error notification is performed when the front door 12 is opened and closed. . Therefore, when the fraudster knows that error notification will be performed when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the front door 12 is opened without closing after the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one. It is conceivable to start the game without changing the output of the door detection sensor 24 by inserting a key into the key cylinder 20 and rotating it.

  However, in the normal process, when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened, the lottery process and the reel control process, the medal Since the payout process and the bonus game process are not executed, the main game is started in the main controller 131 in a state where the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. Can be prevented. Further, when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened, some illegal act is performed in the slot machine 10. Although the error notification setting process is executed, the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. It can be recognized that the game has started.

  In addition, when the process of S709 or the process of S710 is Yes, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S712, without performing the error alert setting process of S711. This is because the front door 12 is closed if the fraudster recognizes that the game cannot be executed when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is left open. After that, the game is executed. As will be described later, in the display control device 111, when there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced with an unauthorized one, a process for notifying the fact is executed, so the front door 12 is closed and the game is executed. This is because it is possible to let outsiders recognize fraud before being done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the lottery process in S712 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a lottery process executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131, and FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a lottery table.

  When the lottery process is executed, a random number used for determining whether or not the winning combination is made in the random number creating process is created (S801). The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 71 is operated, the hardware latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. After confirming the operation of the start lever 71, the MPU 151 stores the value latched by the hardware in the game information storage area 153c of the RAM 153. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly generate a random number at the timing when the start lever 71 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 71 is operated.

  When the random number generation process of S801 is completed, a lottery table for determining whether or not the game is successful is selected based on the current setting state and gaming state of the slot machine 10 (S802). Here, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is any one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When “setting 1”, the lottery table having the lowest BB winning probability is selected, and when “setting 6” is set. The lottery table having the highest BB winning probability is selected.

  Here, the lottery table will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a lottery table selected under the normal state of “Setting 1”. In the lottery table, the same number of index values IV as the number of winning combinations is set. That is, under the normal state, five types of winnings of replay, cherry, bell, watermelon, and BB can occur (see FIG. 6), so five index values IV of 1 to 5 are set. Each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination, and a point value PV is set. In each lottery table in the slot machine 10, the point value PV corresponding to the BB combination is set larger as the lottery table has a higher set value.

  In the process of S803, the index value IV is set to 1 (S803), and a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set (S804). In the determination value setting, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value created in S801 is used as the current determination value DV, and a new determination is made by adding a point value PV corresponding to 1 as the current index value IV to the random value. Let it be the value DV.

  When the determination value DV is set in the process of S804, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (S805). In the determination of whether or not a winning combination is made, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the determining value DV exceeds 65535 (S805: Yes), the winning flag of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set ( S806). Incidentally, when the winning flag is a small role winning flag or a re-game winning flag, these winning flags are reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set (see S703 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the BB winning flag, the BB winning flag is reset as one of the conditions that the combination of the BB symbols is established on the active line. That is, the BB winning flag may be valid for a plurality of games. In addition, in the success / failure determination of the winning combination after the next game carrying over the BB winning flag, the determination of whether or not the small combination or replay is made is performed, but the determination of whether or not the BB is related is not performed.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in the processing of S805 (S805: No), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S807), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a role to be determined as appropriate (S808). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table.

  If it is determined in the process of S808 that there is a winning combination to be determined (S808: Yes), the process returns to S804 to continue the determination of winning combination. At this time, in the process of S804, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous combination is a correct determination value DV. In the process of S805, whether or not the winning combination is determined is performed based on the determination value DV. Incidentally, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 17 is selected, the BB winning probability is about 1/300. On the other hand, the replay and small role winning probabilities are set higher than the BB winning probability, the replay winning probability is about 1 / 7.3, the bell winning probability is about 1 / 7.0, and the cherry and watermelon winning probabilities The probability is 1/128.

  After the winning flag is set in the process of S806, or when there is no winning combination that should be determined in S808 (S808: No), this means that the winning determination of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, a set value command is set (S809), and a lottery result command is set (S810). Here, the set value command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp the current set value, and the lottery result command is a display control device in order to grasp the result of the combination determination. 111 is a command transmitted to 111.

  Thereafter, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is executed (S811), and this process ends. Here, the slip table is a table in which it is determined how much the reel is slid (rotated) and stopped after the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed. In other words, the slip table is a symbol that reaches the base point position (on the lower line in this embodiment) when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed, and a stop symbol that actually stops at the base point position. This is a stop data group with a defined relationship.

  In the slot machine 10, when the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated, when the reaching symbol is stopped as it is, when the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, it is stopped after sliding for two symbols. In this case, five patterns are prepared as a reel stop mode, in the case of stopping after sliding for three symbols, and for stopping after sliding for four symbols. This closely matches the timing at which the player operates the stop switches 72 to 74 and the symbol arrangement (hereinafter referred to as “stop appearance”) that stops in a visible range from each display window 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a device for associating. That is, by stopping the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R until the specified time (190 msec) has elapsed from the timing at which the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated, it is as if the stop outcome has been determined by the player's operation. It is possible to make a player have a good impression. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to 4 symbols, it becomes possible to stop combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery on the active line as much as possible within the specified time. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the reel control process executed in S713 of the main process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. In order to facilitate understanding, the description will be made in accordance with the progress of the actual game and will be described with reference to the symbol arrangement of FIG. 5 as appropriate.

  When the reel control process is executed, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is performed (S901). This rotation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the rotation start process executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131. When the rotation start process is executed, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game (S1001), and the wait time has elapsed. If not (S1001: No), when a wait wait command is set (S1002), the process waits until the wait time elapses. Here, the wait-wait command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the wait time has not elapsed.

  On the other hand, if the wait time has elapsed in S1001 (S1001: Yes), the wait time for the next game is reset (S1003). Thereafter, a wait end command is set (S1004), and the bet number of medals to be output to the external concentration terminal board 171 in the process of S209 of the timer interrupt process is set (S1005). Here, the wait end command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that the wait time has elapsed.

  In the process of S1006, a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the game information storage area 153c is executed (S1006). By performing this process, the acceleration process of the stepping motors 61L to 61R is started in the stepping motor control process (S206) of the timer interrupt process, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 71, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may not immediately start rotating.

  In the process of S1007, a rotation information command is set (S1007). Here, the rotation information command is a command transmitted to cause the display control device 111 to grasp the rotation status of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. Next, in the processing of S1008, it is confirmed whether or not each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is rotating at a constant speed (S1008), and if not rotating at a constant speed (S1008: No). The process waits until each reel 42L, 42M, 42R rotates at a constant speed. Thereafter, when each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R rotates at a constant speed (S1008: Yes), a constant speed rotation command is set (S1009), and this process ends.

  Here, the constant speed rotation command is a command transmitted to make the display control device 111 know that the rotation speed of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has become constant. Further, the MPU 151 indicates that when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation can be performed by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 72 to 74. To inform.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the processing after S902 of the reel control processing will be described. In the processing of S902, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 72 to 74 has been operated to generate a reel stop command, and more specifically whether or not an ON signal has been received from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. Confirmation is made (S902), and if a stop command is not generated (S902: No), the system waits until a stop command is generated.

  On the other hand, if any of the stop switches 72 to 74 is operated and a stop command is generated in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, one reel It is confirmed whether or not the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated when only the motor is rotating (S903).

  If any of the stop switches 72 to 74 is operated while all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotating in the process of S903 (S903: No), the current stop command is the first stop command. Means the first change processing of the slip table (S904). The first sliding table changing process is a changing process of the sliding table that is performed before the reels are stopped based on the generation of the stop command.

  After the smooth table first change process of S904 is completed, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the lower line at this timing is confirmed (S905). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower line is confirmed by the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 is output.

  In the processing of S906, the slip amount of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the compressed data of the symbol number corresponding to the reaching symbol among the slip tables set in the slip table storage area of the game information storage area 153c (S906). The symbol number of the symbol to be actually stopped on the lower line is determined (S907). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol (S908), and waits until they are equal (S908: No). (S908: Yes), a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is executed (S909).

  In the process of S910, a rotation information command is set to cause the display control device 111 to grasp the current rotation state of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R (S910), and then a stop symbol command is set (S911). Here, the stop symbol command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp a symbol stopped in a range (upper, middle, lower) visible from the display window.

  In the process of S912, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (S912). When the above-described processing of S903 to S911 is performed based on the first stop command, since the two reels are still rotating (S912: No), the sliding table second change processing is executed (S913). The sliding table second changing process is a sliding table changing process performed after the reels are stopped.

  When the slip table second change process of S913 is completed, the process returns to S902, and the processes of S903 to S913 are repeatedly executed until all reels are stopped. When all the reels are stopped (S912: Yes), a payout determination process (S914) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the payout determination process executed in the process of S914 of the reel control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a payout determination process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the payout determination process is executed, the active line is confirmed based on the current gaming state (S1101). Although details will be described later, this is because the active line is changed from 5 lines to 1 line (medium line) when the game state shifts to the BB game. Next, a combination of symbols on a predetermined effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower line of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R (S1102), and it is confirmed whether or not a winning is achieved (S1102). S1103).

  If a winning is established in the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning winning combination matches the winning flag set in the lottery processing (S1104). If the winning combination combination and the winning flag match in the processing of S1104 (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1107, and if the winning combination combination and the winning flag do not match (S1104: No), The slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed (S1105).

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the reset switch 123 has been operated (S1106), and waits until the reset switch 123 is operated (S1106: No). When the reset switch 123 is operated (S1106: Yes), the process returns from the error state and proceeds to the process of S1107, and the subsequent processes are started.

  In the process of S1107, the winning combination is set (S1107), and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is set in the expected payout number storage area of the game information storage area 153c (S1108). Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the payout determination has been completed for all the active lines (S1109). If not completed (S1109: No), the processing returns to S1102. That is, in this embodiment, when three medals are bet and five effective lines are set, it is sequentially determined whether or not a winning is achieved for each effective line.

  For example, when the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the upper line, 2 is set as the number of payouts in the processing of S1102 to S1108 for the upper line, and the payout is performed in the processing of S1102 to S1108 for the lower right line 2 is set again as the planned number. As a result, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the upper line, 4 is set as the expected payout number, and four medal payouts are performed in the medal payout process described later.

  If the payout determination is completed for all active lines in the processing of S1109 (S1109: Yes), a winning command is set (S1110), a winning line command is set (S1111), and this processing is terminated. Here, the winning command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp which winning has been established, and the winning line command indicates which active line the winning has been established. This is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 for grasping.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the medal payout process executed in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the medal payout process is executed, it is confirmed whether or not the planned payout number stored in the payout number storage area is 0 (S1201). If the planned payout number is 0 (S1201: Yes), it means that it has been determined in the process of S1114 of the previous payout determination process that a small role winning has not been established. Based on the winning winning combination, it is confirmed whether or not a re-game winning is achieved (S1202).

  If the re-game winning is not established in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the process is terminated as it is, and if the re-game winning is established (S1202: Yes), the game state is reset. A re-game setting process for changing to a gaming state is executed (S1203), and a re-game command is set (S1204), and this process ends. Here, the replay command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that the next game is a replay. In the start waiting process (S704) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  In the process of S1201, if the planned payout number is not 0 (S1201: No), a payout start command is set (S1205). Here, the payout start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the medal payout has started.

  In the process of S1206, it is confirmed whether or not the number of payouts counted by the number-of-payout counter matches the number of payouts stored in the payout number storage area (S1206). If they do not match (S1206: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50) (S1207).

  If the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit in the processing of S1207 (S1207: No), the credit counter count value is incremented by 1 (S1208), the number of payouts is incremented by 1 (S1209), and the credit display unit 35 And the display part change process which adds 1 each of the number of sheets of the acquired number display part 37 is performed (S1210), and it transfers to the process of S1206.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit in the processing of S1207 (S1207: Yes), the medal payout rotating plate is driven (S1209), and the medal is passed from the hopper device 91 through the medal discharge port 17. And pays out to the medal tray 18. Then, 1 is added to the number of payouts according to the medal detection signal of the payout detection sensor 91a attached to the hopper device 91 (S1210), and a display portion changing process is performed to add 1 to the number of acquired number display portion 37 (S1211). , The process proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206, when the number of payouts matches the planned payout number (S1206), a payout end command is set (S1212). Here, the payout end command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the medal payout has ended.

  In the process of S1213, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus game (S1213). If the current gaming state is a bonus game (S1213: Yes), the count value of a remaining acquisition number counter to be described later is used. A process of subtracting the number of payouts and subtracting the number of remaining acquisition number display part 36 is performed (S1214), and this process ends. Note that the process of subtracting the number of remaining acquisition number display part 36 may be performed in the display part changing process of S1211.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the bonus game process executed in S715 of the normal process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing bonus game processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  First, prior to the description of the bonus game process, the bonus game will be described. The BB game is composed of a plurality of RB games. The RB game is composed of 12 JAC games. A JAC game is a game in which only one bet is allowed, and is a game that has a very high probability that a combination of JAC symbols is aligned on an active line, that is, a probability that a JAC winning will be established. That is, in the JAC game, in step S605 of the normal process described above, if the bet number is 1, an affirmative determination is made that the number is a specified number. When a JAC winning is established in the RB game, the maximum number (15 in this case) of medals is paid out. When the JAC winning is established 8 times, the RB game is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times.

  Also, the BB game ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 400). When the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number during the RB game, not only the BB game but also the RB game is ended. This is a contrivance for suppressing the player's euphoria by giving an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out during the BB game, and ensuring the soundness of the game. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols to be transferred to the RB game is not set, and the configuration is set to shift to the RB game immediately after the shift to the BB game and immediately after the RB game ends. Therefore, it can be said that the BB game is a game that continuously shifts to the RB game until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  When the bonus game process is executed, it is first confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a bonus game (S1301). If the bonus game is not being played (S1301: No), the bonus symbol determination process shown in S1302 to S1306 is executed.

  In this bonus symbol determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning flag is set (S1302), and when the BB winning flag is set (S1302: Yes), it is set in the process of S914 of the payout determining process. Based on the winning winning combination, it is confirmed whether or not a BB winning has been established (S1303).

  When the BB winning is established in the process of S1303 (S1303: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S1304). In the BB start process, the BB winning flag is reset and the BB setting flag is set in the BB information storage area 153b to obtain a BB game which is a kind of bonus game. In addition, 400 is set in the remaining acquisition number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and a process of displaying 400 on the remaining acquisition number display unit 36 is performed. Incidentally, whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus game is determined based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set.

  Subsequently, in the process of S1305, an RB start process is executed (S1305). In the RB start process, 8 is set in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is set in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games. Each counter such as a remaining acquisition number counter and a remaining JAC winning counter is provided in the BB information storage area 153b. After performing the RB start process, an RB command transmitted to the display control device 111 is set in order to grasp that the RB game is started (S1306).

  In the process of S1307, a status command is set (S1307). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp the current gaming state. That is, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the BB winning flag is not set, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game is set, and if it is determined in the process of S1303 that a BB winning is not established. Is set with a status command indicating that it is a BB carryover game, and when the RB command is set in the processing of S1306, a status command indicating that it is a BB game is set.

  In the process of S1308, a game number display process is performed (S1308), and this process ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining acquired number display unit 36, the acquired number display unit 37, or the like is performed.

  If the game state is a bonus game in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a JAC prize has been established based on the winning combination set in the process of S914 of the payout determination process ( S1309). When the JAC winning is established in the processing of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC winning counter is decremented by 1 (S1310), and when the JAC winning is not achieved (S1309: No), one JAC game is played. Since it has been digested, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining JAC game counter without performing the processing of S1310 (S1311).

  Subsequently, in the processing of S1312, it is confirmed whether either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S1312). If any of the results in S1312, is 0, that is, if the JAC winning is established 8 times or the JAC game is digested 12 times (S1312: Yes), it means that the RB game end condition is established. Therefore, an RB end process for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S1313).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1314). If it is not 0 (S1314: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. Since this means that the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the above-described RB start process is executed (S1315), and the RB command is set (S1316). Thereafter, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S1307), a game number display process is executed (S1308), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0 in the processing of S1312, that is, when the JAC winning is not yet established 8 times and the JAC game is not consumed 12 times. (S1312: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1317). If the counter value is not 0 in the processing of S1317 (S1317: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the BB game end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S1307), a game number display process is executed (S1308), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the special game state end shown in S1318 to S1319 is completed. Execute the process. In the special game state end process, first, the above-described RB end process is executed (S1318), and then the BB end process for clearing the data in the BB information storage area 153b is executed (S1319). Further, in the above-described processing of S1314, even when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1314: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the BB end processing of S1619 is executed. To do. After performing the BB termination process, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game is set (S1307), a game number display process is performed (S1308), and this process is terminated.

  Next, each control process executed by the display control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU processing is broadly divided into a display main process that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a control signal from the main controller 131. There is a command interrupt process that is activated based on the input. Here, for convenience of explanation, display timer interrupt processing and command interrupt processing will be described first, and then display main processing will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing display timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The display timer interrupt process is a process periodically executed by the display control device 111, and is executed, for example, every 1 msec based on the clock signal generated from the clock circuit 183.

  When the display timer interrupt process is executed, the next command interrupt is prohibited (S2001), and 1 is added to the interrupt timer counter 186b (S2002). Thereafter, the interrupt flag is read (S2003), and the interrupt flag is cleared (S2004). Then, the next command interruption is permitted (S2005), and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. As described above, the main control device 131 transmits various commands to the display control device 111 according to the current game state, the progress of the game, and the like. The display control device 111 immediately executes command interrupt processing based on the reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 131, more specifically, based on the signal input from the signal latch circuit 182.

  When the command interrupt process is executed, the next timer interrupt is prohibited (S2101), and it is confirmed whether or not the strobe signal is normal (S2102). The strobe signal is a signal transmitted from the main controller 131 together with the command, and the MPU 181 starts command interrupt processing based on the reception of the strobe signal.

  If the strobe signal is normal in the processing of S2102 (S2102: Yes), command data is acquired (S2103), and it is confirmed whether or not the acquired command data is normal (S2104). If the command data is normal in the process of S2104 (S2104: Yes), the command reception process is executed (S2105), the maximum number is set in the retry counter (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2109.

  If the acquired command data is not normal in the process of S2104 (S2104: No), the value of the retry counter is incremented by 1 (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2109. On the other hand, if the strobe signal is not normal in the process of S2102 (S2102: No), it is determined that there is some malfunction, the maximum number is set in the retry counter (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109.

  In the processing of S2109, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the retry counter is the maximum value (S2109). If the value of the retry counter is the maximum value (S2109: Yes), the command from the main control device 131 has been normally received. Alternatively, it means that there is some abnormality in the command from the main control device 131, and the command could not be received normally even though the command interruption processing for the allowable number of retries was performed. In such a case, the value of the retry counter is cleared (S2110), the interrupt flag is read (S2111), and the interrupt flag is cleared (S2112).

  If the retry counter value is not the maximum value in the processing of S2109 (S2109: No), or if the interrupt flag is cleared in the processing of S2112, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S2113), and this processing Exit.

  When a command is received from the main controller 131 during the display timer interrupt process, this command is latched by the signal latch circuit 182, and the command interrupt process is executed immediately after the display timer interrupt process is completed. Similarly, when the display timer interrupt processing timing comes during the command interrupt processing, the clock signal is latched by the latch circuit 184, and the display timer interrupt processing is executed immediately after the command interrupt processing ends. . That is, the slot machine 10 is configured such that multiple interrupts do not occur between the display timer interrupt process and the command interrupt process.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. When the command reception process is executed in step S2105 of the command interruption process, the display control apparatus 111 first stores the command received from the main control apparatus 131 in the reception command storage area 186a (S2201). In addition to the notification command confirmed in the process of S2202 and the door open / close command confirmed in the process of S2203, the command transmitted from the main controller 131 includes, for example, a variable effect (upper part) that changes when the game is executed. For example, a change command for instructing display of the lamp 13 and pronunciation of the speaker 14), a stand-by effect command for instructing a stand-by effect, and the like.

  When the processing of S2201 is completed, the command type received from the main controller 131 is determined, whether or not the received command is a notification command is confirmed (S2202), and if the received command is a notification command (S2202). : Yes), as described above, there is a possibility that the game has been executed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or with the front door 12 opened. The process proceeds to the error notification setting process.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a notification command in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), then it is confirmed whether the received command is a door opening / closing command (S2203), and the received command is a door opening / closing command. If it is not a command (S2203: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2208), and this process is terminated. The process of S2208 is a process of changing the output state of the upper lamp 13 and the speaker 14 based on the above-described change command and standby effect command.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a door opening / closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on (S2204), and the number of opening / closing operations of the front door 12 from the door opening / closing command is determined. Is acquired (S2205). As described above, the door opening / closing command is composed of 2 bytes, and information indicating the opening / closing counter is stored in the second byte, so the second byte information is acquired.

  In the process of S2206, it is confirmed whether or not the opening / closing count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 in the process of S2205 is the same as the value stored in the value of the opening / closing counter 186g of the display control apparatus 111. (S2206). That is, in the process of S2206, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 corresponds to the value stored in the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111. I have confirmed.

  In the process of S2206, when the open / close count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 is different from the value stored in the open / close counter 186g (S2206: No), the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 is set. Since the value does not correspond to the value of the open / close count counter 186g of the display control device 111, either the main control device 131 or the display control device 111 has been replaced. However, in this embodiment, since the display controller 111 compares the value of the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 with the value of the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, the main controller 131 is replaced. The possibility that it was done becomes high. Therefore, in order to notify that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced with an unauthorized one, an error notification setting process is executed (S2207), and this process ends.

  In the error notification setting process of S2207, the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 are used to set a display mode indicating that the main control device 131 may be replaced, or to the key cylinder 20 with the key. Is set in a display mode indicating that the game has been executed in a state in which the game is inserted and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened.

  Further, the notification started by the error notification setting process of S2207 is continuously notified for a predetermined time even when the reset switch 123 is operated and an error reset operation is performed. In the present embodiment, the notification is continuously performed for one minute, and even if the reset switch 123 is operated during that time, the operation is invalidated or ignored. Note that the resetting of the notification is canceled when the reset switch 123 is operated when one minute or more has passed since the start of the notification. Further, the time measurement for 1 minute from the start of error notification may be performed only while power is supplied. In this configuration, even if the power is turned off by an unauthorized person to cancel the error notification, when the power is supplied again, the notification is started within one minute.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the open / close count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 is the same as the value stored in the open / close counter 186g (S2206: No), the open / close counter of the main controller 131 is obtained. Since the value of 153e corresponds to the value of the opening / closing counter 186g of the display control device 111, this process is terminated without executing the error notification setting process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control apparatus 111. The display main process is executed when power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 122.

  When the display main process is executed, the stack pointer value is set in the MPU 181 as an initialization process, and an interrupt mode that permits command interrupt process and display timer interrupt process is set. Thereafter, register groups in the MPU 181 Various settings for the I / O device and the like are performed (S2301).

  When the initialization process of S2301 is completed, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in the present embodiment) (S2302). If it is in a voltage drop state (S2302: Yes), it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S2304).

  On the other hand, if the system state is not a voltage drop state in the process of S2302 (S2302: No), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b is 0 (S2304). If the value of the interrupt timer counter is not 0 (S2304: No), it means that the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b has been updated in the process of S2002 of the display timer interrupt process described above. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening / closing flag 186f is on (S2305). If the current door opening / closing flag 186e is off (S2305: No), then the door opening sensor 26 is activated. It is confirmed whether or not it is on (S2306).

  If the door opening sensor 26 is off in the processing of S2306 (S2306: No), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is not rotated, and the front door 12 is not opened. A drive data output process for outputting drive data to drive the unit is executed (S2308). The drive data output process will be described later.

  If the current door open / close flag 186e is turned on in the process of S2305 or the door open sensor 26 is turned on in the process of S2306 (S2305: Yes or S2306: Yes), a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20. Since the game is executed with the rotation operation being performed or the front door 12 being opened, the error data setting process is executed (S2307), and then the drive data output process is executed (S2307). S2308). Note that the notification set by the error notification setting process of S2307 is also configured to invalidate or ignore the reset operation for a predetermined time.

  In the processing of S2305 to S2308, when the game is executed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated or when the front door 12 is opened, the drive is performed after executing the error notification setting processing. Since the data output process is executed, it is possible to notify the outside that the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is rotated, or that the front door 12 is opened. As described above, when the fraudster knows that an error notification is to be made when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the front door 12 is not closed after the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one. It is conceivable that the game is started with the door opened, or the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to start the game without changing the output of the door detection sensor 24. However, the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20. If the game is executed while the front door 12 is opened or the front door 12 is opened, an error can be notified to the outside, so that the main controller 131 is replaced by an unauthorized person. It is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed. Therefore, even if the cheating person knows that the slot machine 10 notifies the replacement of the main control device 131 at the timing when the front door 12 is opened and closed, a bonus game is forcibly generated by the cheating person. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b is 0 (S2304: Yes), or after the drive data output process is completed, whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 131 is described in more detail. Confirms whether or not a command has been received in the command interrupt process (S2309).

  If a command is received in the process of S2309 (S2309: Yes), a received command check process is performed (S2310). In the received command check process, a process such as determining an auxiliary effect to be performed based on each command stored in the received command storage area 186a in the previous command interruption process is performed. The process performed in the received command check process includes a stop symbol command process performed based on reception of a stop symbol command, a status command process performed based on reception of a status command, and a lottery result command performed based on reception of a lottery result command There are a process, a winning command process performed based on receiving a winning command, a winning line command process performed based on receiving a winning line command, a rotation information command process performed based on receiving a rotation information command, and the like.

  Specifically, for example, if the received command is a lottery result command meaning BB winning, whether or not to perform an auxiliary effect suggesting BB winning, and what kind of auxiliary effect is to be performed A process of determining a specific aspect of the auxiliary effect to be performed is performed, such as whether to perform the auxiliary effect or at which stop command generation timing the BB winning is suggested. In addition, when a rotation information command or a stop symbol command is received, it is determined whether or not the BB winning suggestion timing determined at the time of receiving the lottery result command. Set. That is, in the received command check process, the drive control content of the auxiliary effect section is determined based on the command data received from the main control device 131.

  On the other hand, when the command is not received in the processing of S2309 (S2309: No), or after the reception command check processing is completed, update processing of the random number value used when selecting the auxiliary effect is executed (S2311). ), The process returns to the process of S2302, and the processes of S2302 to S2311 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing drive data output processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The drive data output process is a process for outputting drive data to drive the auxiliary effect section. That is, in the slot machine 10, command data from the main control device 131 is acquired by the command interrupt process, an auxiliary effect is determined based on the command data acquired by the received command check process, and the drive data output process is performed. The auxiliary production unit is driven.

  When the drive data output process is executed, the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is reset (S2401), and the startup command check process is executed (S2402). As described above, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111 (S510). Therefore, if a power recovery command is not received within a predetermined time (within 2 seconds in the present embodiment) after the power is turned on, the drive control of the auxiliary effect section is executed in the startup command check process, and an error is generated. Inform.

  In the processing of S2403, device control processing is executed (S2403). Although details will be described later, when various commands are received from the main control device 131, an auxiliary effect to be performed by the auxiliary effect unit is determined based on the received command. In the device control process, a process of outputting the corresponding drive data to the auxiliary effect unit to perform the determined auxiliary effect is performed. By performing such a process, for example, an auxiliary effect such that the upper lamp 13 is lit in a predetermined color or a predetermined character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is performed.

  In the process of S2404, a system state change process is executed (S2404). The system state includes a voltage drop state, an initialization state, and a normal state, and the auxiliary display unit 15 is initialized according to the system state each time.

  In the process of S2405, a voltage drop check process is executed (S2405). In the voltage drop check process, the power failure signal supplied from the input / output port 187 is monitored, and the system state is changed from the normal state to the voltage drop state when the power failure signal is switched from the OFF state to the ON state.

  In the process of S2406, a specific time process is executed (S2406). The specific time process is a process periodically performed every predetermined specific time (10 msec in the present embodiment). For example, the output data buffer is updated by the LED data table for driving the upper lamp 13, and the speaker 14. This is a process for changing the volume of the musical sound output from.

  In the process of S2407, a drive data switching process is executed (S2407). The drive data switching process is a process for switching drive data according to the passage of time, gaming state, etc., except when receiving a command from the main controller 131. In the drive data switching processing, for example, processing such as switching of the color for lighting the upper lamp 13 and switching of the display scene displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is performed. That is, the drive data change process is a process for changing the auxiliary effect with time, unlike the above-described specific time process.

  In the processing of S2408, door opening / closing monitoring processing is executed (S2408). The door opening / closing monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11 from the input state of the door detection sensor 24. Specifically, a process of determining as an error (abnormality) a case where a door opening / closing command is not received from the main control device 131 after a predetermined time (for example, 10 msec) has elapsed since it was determined that the front door 12 was opened / closed. It is. This door opening / closing monitoring process will be described later.

  In the process of S2409, the value of the interrupt timer counter is cleared (S2409), and then it is confirmed again whether the system state is a voltage drop state (S2410). If the system state is a voltage drop state in the process of S2410 (S2410: Yes), a power failure process is performed (S2411). If the system state is not a voltage drop state (S2410: No), this process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing specific time processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The specific time process is executed when the process of S2406 of the drive data output process is executed.

  When the specific time process is executed, the value of the 10 msec timer counter is updated (S2501). Specifically, a process of adding the current interrupt timer counter value to the 10 msec timer counter value is performed.

  In the process of S2502, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the 10 msec timer counter is 10 or more (S2502). If it is smaller than 10 (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the 10 msec timer counter is 10 or more in the processing of S2502 (S2502: Yes), it means that the specific time has elapsed, so 10 is subtracted from the value of the 10 msec timer counter (S2503), and S2504 to S2508. After the drive data change process shown in the process is executed, this process ends.

  In the process of S2504, the LED data change process for setting the data from the LED data table to the output data buffer is executed (S2504), and then the auxiliary effect synchronization check for synchronizing the BGM and the LED effect in the bonus game. When the process is executed (S2505) and left unattended during BGM playback, a fade-out process for decreasing the volume of the BGM is executed 30 seconds later (S2506).

  Then, in the process of S2507, when left unattended, a demonstration start check process for starting a demonstration effect is executed 60 seconds later (S2507), and the volume knob value is checked to change the volume of the sound. The volume check process is executed (S2508), and this process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing door opening / closing monitoring processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. When the door opening / closing monitoring process is executed in S2408 of the drive data output process, a value input from the door detection sensor 24 is acquired (S2601), and the door detection sensor 24 is turned on based on the acquired value. It is confirmed whether or not (S2602). Note that whether the door detection sensor 24 is on or off is determined according to the acquired voltage value as described above.

  If the door detection sensor 24 is on in the process of S2602 (S2602: Yes), the current door open / close flag 186f that stores the open / closed state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S2603), and the door is detected. If the sensor 24 is in an off state (S2602: No), the current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned off (S2604), and the process proceeds to S2605.

  In the process of S2605, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening / closing flag 185e for storing the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12 is ON (S2605). If the previous door opening / closing flag 186e is OFF (S2605: No). ), The process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2606 to S2608. As described above, when the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF. Therefore, when the previous door open / close flag 186e is off, the door is already opened or closed, and the process directly proceeds to S2609.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening / closing flag 186e was turned on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is started, and then the current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned on. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S2606). As described above, when the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF, so if the current door open / close flag 186f is ON (S2606). : Yes), since the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is continued and the opening or closing is not completed, the process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2607 and S2608.

  On the other hand, if the current door opening / closing flag 186f is off in the processing of S2606 (S2606: No), the front door 12 has completed the opening / closing operation with respect to the housing 11, and is transmitted from the main controller 131. In order to set the timing for confirming the door opening / closing command, the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 10 (S2607), the value 1 is added to the opening / closing counter 186g (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609. .

  In the processing of S2609, the value of the current door opening / closing flag 186f is stored in the previous door opening / closing flag 186e (S2609), and then it is confirmed whether the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610). The command check timer 186c has the value 0 until the value 10 is set in the processing of S2607 described above, that is, in the initial state. Therefore, if the process of S2610 is in an initial state (S2610: No), the process is terminated without executing the processes of S2611 to S2615.

  On the other hand, if the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 in the processing of S2610 (S2610: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the command check timer 186c (S2611), and the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 0. It is confirmed whether or not (S2612).

  If the value of the command check timer 186c is not 0 in the process of S2612 (S2612: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2612: Yes), the front door 12 When a predetermined time elapses after the door is opened and closed, it is time to determine whether or not a door open / close command from the main controller 131 has been received. Therefore, the door open / close command reception flag 186d is turned on upon receipt of the door open / close command. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S2613).

  By setting 10 as the value of the command check timer 186c, it is possible to provide a waiting time until a door open / close command is received from the main control device 131. Therefore, the doors in the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are provided. A shift in the confirmation timing of the detection sensor 24 can be taken into consideration. Therefore, it can be accurately determined whether or not the front door 12 has been opened and closed with respect to the housing 11. The door opening / closing command is determined at a timing 10 m after the door opening / closing monitoring process (drive data output process) is executed every 1 msec and the display control device 111 detects the opening of the front door 12.

  If the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2613 (S2613: Yes), the door opening / closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. In order to monitor the opening, the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned off (S2614). If the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is off (S2613: No), the door opening / closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. If not, an error notification setting process is performed (S2615), and this process ends.

  Note that the error notification setting process of S2615 is a process of setting the outputs of the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and a display mode for notifying the outside that the main control device 131 may be replaced. And audio output is set. In addition, the notification set by the error notification setting process of S2615 is also configured to invalidate or ignore the reset operation for a predetermined time.

  Therefore, since the door opening / closing command cannot be received unless the main control device 131 is replaced with a proper one, it is possible to notify each time the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced. It is possible to reliably notify the outside that there is. Of course, if the power is turned off to cancel the error notification, the game cannot be executed.

  As described above, the door detection sensor 24 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, and the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11 (opening operation or closing operation). Then, a door opening / closing command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111. The display control device 111 confirms that the front door 12 has been opened / closed, and after a predetermined time (10 msec), It is confirmed whether or not a door opening / closing command has been received from the control device 131, and if the door opening / closing command has not been received after a predetermined time, it is notified to the outside that the main control device 131 may have been replaced. ing. When the hall official recognizes the notification, it confirms whether or not the main control device 131 has been replaced. If the main control device 131 is an unauthorized main control device, replace it with a regular main control device or use the slot machine. Since the ten games can be stopped, it is possible to prevent a bonus game (BB game) from being illegally generated by an unauthorized main control device and paying out medals.

  Here, when the slot machine 10 is installed in a hall, a plurality of the slot machines 10 are arranged on the island, so that the power supply outlet exposed to the outside from the slot machine 10 is provided inside the island. It is inserted into the outlet. Therefore, the supply and stop of the power to the slot machine 10 are performed collectively on the entire island or by operating the power switch 122 provided inside the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a fraudster opens the front door 12 with a tool such as a bar, or inserts a lock key into the key cylinder 20 to open the front door 12 and replaces the main controller 131 with an unauthorized one, In order for the fraudster to play a game, the front door 12 must be closed with power supplied. Therefore, in order to play a game, the front door 12 must be closed while power is supplied. Therefore, a door open / close command is always transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111, and the display control device 111. Thus, it is possible to reliably notify that the main control device 131 may be replaced with an unauthorized one. Furthermore, the fraudster knows that the main control device 131 may have been replaced with an unauthorized one when the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the game is started with the front door 12 open. In this case, or when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and being rotated, the execution of the game is prohibited and an error is notified. Is never done. Therefore, when the main controller 131 is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, it is possible to reliably notify the error and prevent the unauthorized main controller 131 from starting a game. be able to.

  The number of times the front door 12 is opened is stored by the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, and is stored in the open / close counter 153e and the open / close counter 186g. If the number of times does not correspond, a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, when the main controller 131 is replaced, not only notification based on the door opening / closing command but also notification based on the number of times the front door 12 is opened can be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the hall personnel and the like more surely recognize that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced.

  Further, when trying to know the values stored in the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, it takes time to analyze the open / close counter 153e. Since the fraudster exchanges the main control device 131 at an early stage because it is not known to the hall-related persons or the like, if the fraudulent person knows the existence of the open / close counter 153e, the open / close count Since it takes time to analyze the counter 153e, the act of replacing the main controller 131 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of illegally exchanging the main control device 131.

  The main control device 131 is included in the substrate box and attached to the housing 11, and the display control device 111 is included in the substrate box and attached to the front door 12. Therefore, since it takes time to replace the two board boxes of the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, it is possible to suppress the act of being replaced with an unauthorized main control device and display control device itself. it can. Further, the main control device 131 is attached to the housing 11, the display control device 111 is attached to the front door 12, and the two substrate boxes are separated from each other, so that it takes time for the replacement work. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action itself that is exchanged for an unauthorized main control device and display control device.

  Further, since the outer shape of the main control device 131 is covered with the casing 11 and the front door 12, the front door is always used when an unauthorized person replaces the main control device 131 with an unauthorized main control device. 12 must be opened. Further, when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the metal fitting 22 is always moved. The movement of the metal fitting 22 is detected by the door detection sensor 24 and replaced with an unauthorized main controller. It is determined whether or not. Therefore, according to the configuration of the slot machine 10, it is possible to detect that it has been replaced with an unauthorized main control device, and to reliably notify it.

  In the first embodiment, when the game is started, it is checked whether the door opening sensor 26 or the door detection sensor 24 is on, and at least one of the door opening sensor 26 or the door detection sensor 24 is on. If it is, it is determined that the game is started with the front door 12 opened, or that the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 (S709: Yes or S710: Yes or S2305: Yes or S2306). : Yes), the error notification is set without executing the main control of the game, but the door opening sensor 26 is on without checking whether the door detection sensor 24 is on. It may be configured to check whether or not.

  Next, the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32 and FIG. In the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the housing 11 and it is determined whether or not the main controller 131 has been replaced during the opening operation and the closing operation of the front door 12. Instead, in the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12 and it is determined whether or not the main controller 131 has been replaced during the closing operation of the front door 12. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment performs the same processing as the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 29 of the first embodiment. In the following explanation, “current door open / close flag” is “current door open flag”, “previous door open / close flag” is “previous door open flag”, and “door open / close command reception flag” is “door close flag received”. “Flag” and “door open / close command” are read as “door close command”, and “open / close counter” is read as “open counter”.

  FIG. 30 is a view schematically showing a part of the structure for locking the front door 12 of the second embodiment with respect to the housing 11. Although not shown, a cover that covers the door detection sensor 1024 is attached to the door detection sensor 1024 of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in 2nd Embodiment, the door detection sensor 1024 is attached to the bracket 1024a connected with the locking device of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the door detection sensor 1024 is opened and closed in conjunction with the opening and closing operation of the front door 12.

  In addition, when the front door 12 is opened when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 of the second embodiment moves in conjunction with the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 ( It is configured to be held in the posture shown in FIG. When the key cylinder 20 is rotated and the interlocking rod 21 moves upward, the hook 22 is held by holding the interlocking rod 21 moved upward by a holding mechanism (not shown). In addition, the holding mechanism (not shown) is configured to release the holding of the interlocking rod 21 by contacting a part of the housing 11 when the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, while the front door 12 is opened, the saddle fitting 22 is held in the posture shown in FIG. 30B, so that the output of turning on the door detection sensor 1024 is continued. A change in the output state of the door detection sensor 1024 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33B is a graph showing the relationship between the change in the output of the door detection sensor 1024 and the time when the state of the front door 12 changes. Before the time t1 shown in FIG. 33 (b), the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. Therefore, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is off. When the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves and blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024 (time t 1). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is on at time t1.

  And even if the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing | casing 11, since the metal fitting 22 is hold | maintained by the holding mechanism mentioned above in the position which shields the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024, the front door 12 is closed. The ON state is continued until time t4.

  Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 and the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the tip 22a of the saddle fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23, the holding of the saddle fitting 22 is released. The metal fitting 22 moves upward and the shielding of the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024 is released (time t4). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is turned off at time t4.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 32 schematically shows the electrical configuration of the display control device 111 of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the RAM 153 of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, the opening / closing counter 153e and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f and the current door opening / closing flag 153g are replaced with the opening / closing counter 153e and the current door opening / closing flag 153g. A previous door opening flag 153f and a current door opening flag 153g are provided.

  The opening number counter 153e is a counter for storing the number of times the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the casing 11, and is added when the front door 12 is closed after being opened (the process of S407 in FIG. 12). Is done. It should be noted that the number of times stored in the opening number counter 153e is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the process of S407 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  The previous and current door opening flags 153f and 153g are flags that indicate whether or not the front door 12 is open (opening) with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f is the front door 12 or not. The previous door open / close flag 153g indicates the current open state of the front door 12. The current door opening flag 153g is turned on or off in the processing of S403 and S404 of the door opening / closing command setting processing (see FIG. 12), and the previous door opening flag 153f is the processing of S410 of the door opening / closing command setting processing this time. The value of the door opening flag 153g is stored as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the RAM 186 of the display control device 111 of the second embodiment has a door opening / closing command reception flag 186d, a previous door opening / closing flag 186e, a current door opening / closing flag 186f, and an opening / closing counter. Instead of 186g, a door closing command reception flag 186d, a previous door opening flag 186e, a current door opening flag 186f, and an opening counter 186g are provided.

  The door closing command reception flag 186d is a flag indicating whether or not a door closing command has been received from the main controller 131. When the door closing command is received in the command receiving process (see FIG. 25), the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the process of S2204. In step S2614 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), the process is turned off.

  The previous and current door opening flags 186e and 186f are flags that indicate whether or not the front door 12 is in an open state (opening) with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening flag 186e is a front door. 12 indicates the previous open state, and the current door open flag 186f indicates the current open state of the front door 12. The current door opening flag 186f is turned on or off in the processing of S2603 and S2604 in the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), and the previous door opening flag 186e is opened in the current door opening / closing monitoring process in S2609. The value of the middle flag 186f is stored as it is.

  The opening number counter 186g is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the housing 11, and when the front door 12 is closed after being opened (the processing of S2608 in FIG. 29), 1 is added. Is done. The number of times stored in the open / close counter 186g is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S2608 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  Here, the door open / close command setting process (see FIG. 12), normal process (see FIG. 15), command reception process (see FIG. 25), display main process (see FIG. 26), door open / close executed in the second embodiment. The monitoring process (see FIG. 29) will be briefly described.

  In the door opening / closing command setting process executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on based on the value acquired in the process of S401 (S402), and the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on. If it is in the open state (S402: Yes), the current door open flag 135g that stores the open state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S403), and if the door detection sensor 1024 is in the off state. (S402: No), this time the door opening flag 135g is turned off (S404).

  In the process of S405, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening flag 135f that stores the previous opening state of the front door 12 is ON (S405). If the previous door opening flag 135f is OFF, (S405: No), since the front door 12 is closed, the process proceeds to S410. If the previous door open flag 135f is on (S405: Yes), the front door 12 is open. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 135g is turned on (S406).

  If the current door open flag 135g is turned on in the process of S406 (S406: Yes), the front door 12 is still in an open state, so the process proceeds to S410 and the current door open flag 135g is set. If it is off (S406: No), the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, so 1 is added to the value of the opening number counter 135e (S407), and the value of the opening number counter 135e. A door closing command (a signal including a door closing signal and a closing frequency signal) based on the above is created (S408).

  Then, the door closing command created in the processing of S408 is stored in a predetermined area of the transmission command storage area 135h (S409), and when the door opening / closing command setting processing is executed next, the open state of the front door 12 is confirmed. In order to do this, the value of the current door opening flag 135g is stored in the previous door opening flag 135f (S410), and this process ends.

  Further, in the normal processing executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 153g is on in the processing of S709, and whether or not the door opening sensor 26 is on in the processing of S710. If at least one is on (S709: Yes or S710: Yes), the game is played with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. Since it is started, an error notification setting process is executed (S711). On the other hand, if the current door opening flag 153g is off and the door opening sensor 26 is off (S709: No, S710: No), the processing after S712 is executed.

  Next, when command reception processing is executed in the second embodiment, the display control device 111 stores the command transmitted from the main control device 131 in the reception command storage area 186a, and the received command in the processing of S2203. Is a door closing command. If the received command is not a door closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2203), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a door closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on (S2204), and the front door 12 is closed after the door closing command is opened. The obtained number of times of release is acquired (S2205), and it is confirmed whether or not the acquired number of times of release is the same as the value stored in the value of the number of times of release counter 186g of the display control device 111 (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when the number of releases acquired from the main controller 131 is different from the value stored in the number-of-opens counter 186g (S2206: No), there is a possibility that one of the controllers has been replaced. Therefore, error notification setting processing is executed (S2207), and when the number of releases acquired from the main control device 131 is the same as the value stored in the number-of-releases counter 186g (S2206: No), error notification setting processing is performed. This process is terminated without executing.

  In the display main process executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 186f is turned on in the process of S2305, and whether or not the door open sensor 26 is turned on in the process of S2306. If at least one of them is on (S2305: Yes or S2306: Yes), the game is performed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or with the front door 12 opened. Therefore, the error notification setting process is executed (S2307), and if the current door opening flag 186f is off and the door opening sensor 26 is off (S2305: No, S2306: No) Without executing the error notification setting process, the process proceeds to the drive data output process of S2308.

  Next, when the door opening / closing monitoring process is executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on based on the value acquired in the process of S2601 (S2602), and the door detection sensor 1024 is checked. Is on (S2602: Yes), the current door open flag 186f that stores the open state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S2603), and the door detection sensor 1024 is turned off. If so (S2602: No), the current door opening flag 186f is turned off (S2604), and the process proceeds to S2605.

  In the process of S2605, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening flag 185e that stores the previous opened state of the front door 12 is ON (S2605), and if the previous door opening flag 186e is OFF (S2605). : No), since the front door 12 is closed, the process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2606 to S2608.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening flag 186e is turned on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: Yes), the front door 12 is being opened. Next, whether or not the current door opening flag 186f is turned on. (S2606) If the current door open flag 186f is on (S2606: Yes), the front door 12 is still open, so the process proceeds to S2609, and the current door open flag 186f is set. If it is off (S2606: No), it means that the front door 12 has been closed with respect to the housing 11, so that the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 10 (S2607) and the value of the open counter 186g is set. 1 is added (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609.

  In the processing of S2609, the value of the current door opening flag 186f is stored in the previous door opening flag 186e (S2609), and then it is confirmed whether the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610). If the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2610: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610: Yes), the command check timer 186c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2611), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the command check timer 186c has become 0 (S2612).

  If the value of the command check timer 186c is not 0 in the process of S2612 (S2612: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2612: Yes), the front door 12 When a predetermined time elapses after the door is closed, it is time to determine whether or not the door closing command from the main control device 131 has been received, so it is confirmed whether or not the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on. (S2613).

  If the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2613 (S2613: Yes), the door closing command is normally received from the main controller 131, so the next front door 12 In order to monitor the opening, the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned off (S2614), and if the door closing command reception flag 186d is off (S2613: No), the door closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. If not, an error notification setting process is performed (S2615), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the door detection sensor 1024 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, and the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11. When a series of operations are executed, a door closing command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111, and the display control device 111 confirms that the front door 12 is closed after being opened. After a predetermined time (10 msec), it is confirmed whether or not a door closing command has been received from the main controller 131. If the door closing command has not been received after the predetermined time, the main controller 131 may have been replaced. It is informing the outside that there is. Therefore, even if the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one, a notification is given when the power is turned on and the front door 12 is closed to play a game by an unauthorized person. It can be externally recognized that there has been a possibility of being exchanged. When the hall official recognizes the notification, it confirms whether or not the main control device 131 has been replaced. If the main control device 131 is an unauthorized main control device, replace it with a regular main control device or use the slot machine. Since the ten games can be stopped, it is possible to prevent a bonus game (BB game) from being illegally generated by an unauthorized main control device and paying out medals.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the front door 12 is opened, the saddle fitting 22 is held at the moved position, and the ON detection is continued from the door detection sensor 1024. Thus, the state in which the front door 12 is open and the state in which the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 can be accurately distinguished and detected.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times the front door 12 is opened and closed is stored in the number-of-opens counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the number of opens counter 186g of the display controller 111. As in the first embodiment, hall personnel and the like can be made to recognize that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced, and the main control device 131 is illegally replaced. The occurrence of itself can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the metal fitting 22 is held at the moved position, so that the door opening sensor 26 may not be provided. On the contrary, the door detection sensor 26 may be used to detect the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 without providing the door detection sensor 1024 in the movement range of the metal fitting 22. With this configuration, the holding mechanism for holding the metal fitting 22 (interlocking rod 21) in a moved state is not necessary, and the same operation and effect as in the second embodiment can be achieved with a simple structure.

  Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a view showing a connecting portion between the front door 12 and the housing 11. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the first hinge member 3001 and the second hinge member 3002, and FIGS. 34B and 35C show that the support shaft 3011 of the first hinge member 3001 is the second hinge. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a positional relationship in a state of being inserted into an insertion hole 3021 of a member 3002. Note that in FIGS. 34 (b) and 35 (c), the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are shown with hatching to emphasize them.

  In the modification of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34, instead of the door detection sensor 1024 for detecting the state in which the front door 12 is opened, electrodes 3012 and 3022 for detecting the state in which the front door 12 is opened are provided. Is provided. Further, the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are fixed to hinges (first hinge member 3001 and second hinge member 3002) that serve as a support shaft when the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, in the modification of the second embodiment, the surface of the support shaft 3011 of the first hinge member 3001 attached to the housing 11 (support shaft 25a in the first and second embodiments). An electrode 3012 is fixed to the substrate. This electrode 3012 passes through the inside of the first hinge member 3001 and is connected to the cable 3013. On the other hand, an electrode 3022 is fixed to the inner surface of the insertion hole 3021 of the second hinge member 3002 attached to the front door 12. The electrode 3022 passes through the inside of the second hinge member 3002 and is connected to the cable 3023.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows the positional relationship in a state where the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. As shown in the drawing, when the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11, the electrode 3012 of the first hinge member 3001 and the electrode 3022 of the second hinge member 3002 are not in contact with each other. Therefore, the cable 3013 and the cable 3023 are also disconnected, and the input indicating that the front door 12 is being opened to the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 (corresponding to the input of the door detection sensor) is also turned off.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11 in a state where it is rotated in the direction of the arrow from the state of FIG. In this state, the electrode 3012 of the first hinge member 3001 and the electrode 3022 of the second hinge member 3002 are in contact, and an input indicating that the front door 12 is being opened to the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 is on. It becomes.

  Therefore, the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are provided in the portion that always rotates in conjunction with the opening operation of the front door 12, and the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is detected from the contact state of the electrodes 3012 and 3022. It is possible to accurately determine whether or not the door 12 is open. Further, as shown in the figure, the electrode 3022 is an inner surface of the insertion hole 3021 and is fixed to almost the entire periphery except the portion where the electrode 3012 is located when the front door 12 is closed. The opening of the front door 12 can be detected only by slightly opening 12 with respect to the housing 11.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on each embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are disposed inside the substantially box-shaped housing 11 and the front door 12, but the front door 12 opens forward. If it is the structure to be performed, it does not need to be sealed. For example, the present invention may be applied to a structure in which a front door opens and closes with respect to a frame body having four sides (that is, a conventional pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated).

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game has been started with the front door 12 being opened, based on the main control device 131 (the processing of S709 and S710 in FIG. 15) and the display control device 111 (see FIG. 26). (S2305 and S2306). However, it is also possible to make a determination in either one of them.

  In the above embodiment, when the door opening / closing command (or door closing command) is not received from the main control device 131, and the opening / closing number (or opening number) counter 153 e of the main control device 131 and the number of opening / closing operations of the display control device 111. (Or the number of times of opening) When the value with the counter 186g does not correspond, when the game is started with the front door 12 being opened, only the display control device 111 is notified, The board 171 and the display control device 111 may be connected, and a signal indicating the occurrence of an error may be output to an external apparatus (for example, a management computer) via the external concentrated terminal board 171. Furthermore, the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the door opening / closing command transmitted from the main controller 131 may be directly transmitted to the external device, and the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29) may be executed in the external device. .

  Moreover, although the display control apparatus 111 shall be attached to the front door 12, it is good also as a structure attached to places where visual recognition is added, such as the back of the hopper apparatus 91, for example. Further, a control device connected to the door detection sensors 24, 1024, 2024 and the main control device 131 may be provided separately from the display control device 111. In this configuration, a command receiving process (see FIG. 25) and a door open / close monitoring process (see FIG. 29) are executed in a separate control device. Therefore, even when the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are exchanged, it is possible to notify the outside that the main control device has been exchanged illegally.

  In the above embodiment, both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 store the open / close count of the front door 12 in the open / close count counters 153e and 186g, but the values stored in the open / close count counters 153e and 186g. And a table for storing and associating arbitrary values with each other, and when transmitting a door open / close command from the main control device 131, the display control device transmits an arbitrary value corresponding to the value of the open / close counter 153e. In 111, it may be configured to determine whether an arbitrary value corresponding to the value of the opening / closing number counter 186g and the value received from the main control device 131 are the same (corresponding). With this configuration, the value corresponding to the number of times the front door 12 is opened and closed compared between the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 becomes irregular (for example, 111, 3, not the order of 1 to 255). Therefore, the value compared between the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 can be made difficult to be known by an unauthorized person.

  Moreover, although the door detection sensor 26 of the said embodiment shall be attached to the housing | casing 11, it is good also as what is attached to the front door 12. FIG. Furthermore, if it is possible to continuously detect at least one of the front door 12 being opened and closed, the type of the sensor may be a photo sensor or a proximity sensor, Any other type of sensor may be used.

  In the above embodiment, when the game state is a normal game, it is determined whether or not a start command is generated after three medals are bet. However, after one bet or two bets It goes without saying that it may be configured to determine whether or not a start command has been issued even after being issued. However, in the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to store a lottery table corresponding to the betting situation in advance.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having seven effective lines.

  In the above embodiment, the so-called A type slot machine has been described. However, the B type, the C type, the combined type of the A type and the C type, the combined type of the B type and the C type, and the type including the CT game. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, and it is clear that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained in any case. In addition, examples of bonus winning in each type include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, CT winning and the like.

  Further, the symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, and the like, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as identification information (identification information).

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 in which the number of valid lines set in accordance with the number of medals bet has been described, but a certain number (for example, five) of valid lines regardless of the number of medals bet. You may apply to the slot machine which sets. Even when the present invention is applied to such a slot machine, it is clear that the same operational effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been described. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  It is also possible to apply the present invention to a pachinko machine. In the case of a pachinko machine, the gaming machine main body is mounted on the outer frame, and a door member is provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body. The gaming machine main body is provided with a gaming board in which a gaming area as a gaming ball flying area is formed and an operating port and a liquid crystal display device are installed, and the gaming area and liquid crystal are provided by a visual window provided on the door member. The display device is visible. Then, as the game ball launched by the game ball launching device wins the operating opening, an internal lottery is performed and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the liquid crystal display device. Even when the configuration of the main control device and the display control device of the above-described embodiment is applied to such a pachinko machine, it is apparent that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Some pachinko machines output a 2-byte control signal in one command output process. In such a case, the time interval from the output of the first byte command to the output of the second byte command is very short, but the command received in the command interrupt processing as in the above embodiment is If only the reading process is performed and only the process of updating the value of the interrupt timer counter in the display timer interrupt process is performed, the total time required for these interrupt processes may be shorter than the output interval of the command. It is possible to expect the same effect as the above embodiment.

  The gaming machine and modified examples of the present invention are shown below.

  A frame body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the frame body, a main control means that is provided in a space formed by the door body and the frame body and that performs main control of the game, and is provided in the space Sub-control means for performing control in accordance with instructions from the main control means, and connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and for opening and closing the door body with respect to the frame body Detecting means for detecting, and the main control means determines whether or not the door body has been opened and closed with respect to the frame body based on the detection result of the detecting means, and the main judging means Transmitting means for transmitting a door opening / closing signal based on the opening / closing operation of the door body to the sub control means when it is determined that the door body has been opened / closed by the sub control means, , Based on the detection result of the detection means, Sub-determination means for determining whether or not the door body has been opened and closed, and transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means in a state in which it is determined by the sub-determination means that the door body has been opened and closed. A gaming machine 1 comprising first output means for outputting a message to the outside when the door opening / closing signal cannot be received.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the detection means for detecting the opening / closing operation of the door relative to the frame is connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and the main control means determines the frame body based on the detection result by the detection means. Whether the door body is opened or closed is determined by the main determination means. When it is determined by the main judging means that the door body is opened / closed, a door opening / closing signal based on the door body being opened / closed is transmitted to the sub-control means by the transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub-control means, the sub-determination means determines whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame based on the detection result of the detection means, and the door body is opened / closed by the sub-determination means. If the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means cannot be received in the state determined as described above, the fact is output to the outside by the first output means.

  Therefore, it is determined by the main judgment means of the main control means and the sub judgment means of the sub control means whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body. In the sub control means, the door body is opened and closed by the sub judgment means. When the door opening / closing signal cannot be received from the main control means in the state determined to have been operated, the first output means can output that the door body has been opened / closed.

  Therefore, when the main control means is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the door opening / closing signal is not transmitted from the main control means, so the door body is opened or closed by the unauthorized person, and the sub-judging means When it is determined that the door body has been opened and closed, the first output means can output that the main control means may have been replaced.

  Further, since an outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the first output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced. It is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  The opening / closing operation of the door body detected by the detecting means includes an opening operation for opening the door body with respect to the frame body, a closing operation for closing the door body with respect to the frame body, and the opening operation. It includes at least one of a series of operations in which a closing operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine 1, the sub-control unit includes a time-counting unit that counts a time after the sub-determination unit determines that the door body has been opened and closed, and the first output unit is predetermined by the time-measurement unit. A gaming machine 2 that outputs an output when the door opening / closing signal cannot be received before the time is counted.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the time from when it is determined that the door body has been opened / closed by the sub-determination means is counted by the timing means, and the door opening / closing signal is received until the predetermined time is counted by the timing means. If not, the output is performed by the first output means. Therefore, it is accurately determined whether or not the door body has been opened and closed in consideration of the difference between the timing at which the main judgment means of the main control means is executed and the timing at which the sub judgment means of the sub control means is executed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the main control means and the sub control means each include change information storage means for storing change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. Comparison means for comparing change information stored in the change information storage means of the control means with change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means, and a comparison result by the comparison means is the main control A second output means for outputting the change information stored in the change information storage means of the means to the outside when the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means does not correspond; A gaming machine 3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the main control means and the sub-control means each include change information storage means for storing change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. The change information stored in the change information storage means is compared with the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means by the comparison means. If the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means, the fact is indicated to the second output means. Is output by. Therefore, when the main control means is exchanged for an unauthorized person by the fraudulent person, the change information stored in the respective change information storage means does not correspond, so that the output by the second output means can be performed.

  Moreover, since the outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the second output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced, It can be suppressed that the special gaming state is forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  Further, since the change information stored in the change information storage means cannot be known without examining the contents of the change information storage means, it is often necessary to know the change information stored in the change information storage means. It will take a long time. Therefore, since it takes a lot of time to prevent the output of the second output means from being performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means with an unauthorized one.

  In the gaming machine 3, the comparison means and the second output means may be included in the main control means, or may be included in the sub control means. Further, a control means different from the main control means or the sub control means may have the comparison means and the second output means.

  The change information that changes as the door body closes is, for example, the number of times the door body is closed, or a value that changes irregularly as the door body closes (for example, 111 The next value is a value whose numerical value changes in the order of 3 and the next value is 255 or a random value).

  In the gaming machine 3, the change information stored in the change information storage means is the number of times the door body has been opened and closed, and the transmission means is stored in the change information storage means of the main control means together with the door open / close signal. The number of times of opening and closing is transmitted according to the stored number of times, and the comparison means is provided in the sub-control means, the number of times stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means, and the transmission means The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that it compares the number of times according to the transmitted opening / closing number signal.

  According to the gaming machine 4, an opening / closing frequency signal corresponding to the number of times the door body is opened and closed stored in the change information storage unit of the main control unit is transmitted together with the door opening / closing signal by the transmission unit, and is provided in the sub-control unit. The comparison unit compares the number of times stored in the change information storage unit of the sub-control unit with the number of times according to the open / close frequency signal transmitted by the transmission unit. Therefore, the door open / close signal and the open / close frequency signal are transmitted to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means can determine and notify the number of times the door body has been opened / closed. It is possible to reliably determine and notify that the battery has been replaced.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the sub control means stores the opening information of the door body when the sub judgment means determines that the door body has been opened, while the door body is closed. A game is executed when the sub-opening information storage means stores the closing information of the door body when the auxiliary determination means determines that it has been operated, and when the opening information is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means And a third output means for outputting the fact to the outside when the game machine 5 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the door opening information when the sub-determination means determines that the door has been opened, and the door closing when the sub-determination means determines that the door has been closed. When the game is executed when the information is stored in the sub opening / closing information storage means and the opening information is stored in the sub opening / closing information storage means, the fact is output to the outside by the third output means.

  Here, for example, if the fraudster knows that it is a gaming machine that outputs to the outside that the main control means has been exchanged at the timing of opening and closing the door body, An action is considered in which a game is executed without closing the door body and a special game state is forcibly generated.

  However, when the door body is opened and not closed, the opening information is stored in the auxiliary opening / closing information storage means, so that the door remains open even if a game is executed by an unauthorized person. The fact that the game is being executed can be output by the third output means. Therefore, it is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed that there is a possibility that the main control means has been replaced by an unauthorized person.

  Note that the opening or closing operation determined by the sub-determination means is determined when the detection means detects that the door body has actually opened or closed, for example, the detection result by the detection means, When the state changes from off to on to off, or from on to off to on, it may be determined that the operation has been opened or closed.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the main control means includes a lottery means for performing a lottery in a special gaming state that gives an advantageous game value to a player when a game is executed, and the door body. When the main determining means determines that the door has been opened, the door opening information is stored, whereas when the main determining means determines that the door has been closed, the door closing information is stored. And a main opening / closing information storage unit for storing the opening / closing information, and when the release information is stored in the main opening / closing information storage unit, the lottery by the lottery unit is prohibited or ignored.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in the main control means, when a game is executed, the lottery means performs a lottery in a special gaming state that gives an advantageous game value to the player. Further, the main opening / closing information when the main determining means determines that the door has been opened and the closing information of the door when the main determining means determines that the door has been closed are the main opening / closing information. When the information is stored in the information storage means and the opening / closing information is stored in the main opening / closing information storage means, the lottery by the lottery means is prohibited or ignored.

  Here, for example, when a game is executed with the door opened, there is a possibility that some illegal act has been performed in the gaming machine. However, when the door is opened and not closed, the lottery in the special gaming state is prohibited or ignored, so that it is prevented that game value is given to gaming machines that may have been cheated. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the frame body is provided with a first locking member that locks the door body, and the door body is closed with respect to the frame body in the state where the first body is closed. A front end located inside the frame body from one locking member; a rear end portion positioned closer to the door body than the first locking member in a state of being closed with respect to the frame body; a rear end portion and the front end portion And a groove portion that is inscribed by the first locking member. The groove portion and the first locking member are urged to be locked with the groove portion and the first locking member. A second locking member configured to be movable from a state where the second locking member is locked, and the detection means is at a position different from a position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member. The gaming machine 7 is provided within a range in which the second locking member moves.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the first locking member provided on the frame body and the second locking member provided on the door body are locked, and the door body is closed with respect to the frame body. The second locking member is closed to the frame body and has a distal end located on the inner side of the frame body than the first locking member, and the door from the first locking member in a state closed to the frame body. It has a rear end portion located on the body side and a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and inscribed by the first locking member, and biased to a state of locking with the first locking member Has been. That is, when the door body is opened, the first locking member and the second locking member cannot be released unless the second locking member is moved. In addition, since the detection means is provided in a position different from the position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member and within the range in which the second locking member moves, the detection means It can be detected that the second locking member has started to move. Therefore, since the detection means detects that the second locking member that operates without fail when the door body is opened, it can be reliably detected that the door body is opened.

  Also, when the door body is closed from the opened state, the second locking member is detected by the detecting means, and then the first locking member and the second locking member are locked. Therefore, even if the supply of power is cut off and the main control means is illegally replaced, when the power is supplied and the door is closed to play a game, the output is made by the first or second output means. . Accordingly, it is possible to reliably output that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one, and to recognize the possibility that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one by the output.

  In the gaming machine 7, the main judgment means and the sub judgment means are configured such that the second locking member moves and the detection means detects the start of the opening operation of the door body, and then 8. A gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein when the door is opened and detection by the detecting means is not detected, the door is determined to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine 8, after the second locking member moves and the start of the door body opening operation is detected by the detection means, the door body is opened with respect to the frame body, and detection by the detection means is not detected. In this case, the main judgment means and the sub-judgment means judge that the door body has been opened, so that it can be judged that the door body has been opened when the detection state of the detection means has been switched twice. .

  Here, regardless of the switching of the detection means, when the main judgment means and the sub judgment means determine that the door body has been opened according to one detection state, the detection means becomes a detection state due to a failure or the like. Since the main judgment means and the sub-judgment means determine that the door body has been opened, there has been a problem that erroneous determination is likely to occur.

  However, since the main judging means and the sub judging means judge that the door body is opened when the detecting state of the detecting means is switched twice, the door body is opened according to the detection state of 1 regardless of the switching of the detecting means. The occurrence of misjudgment can be reduced compared to the case where it is determined that the operation has been performed.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 8, the main control means is mounted on a first board and included in a first board box, and the sub-control means is different from the first board. A gaming machine 9 which is mounted on a second board and is contained in a second board box different from the first board box.

  According to the gaming machine 9, the main control means is mounted on the first board and included in the first board box, and the sub-control means is mounted on the second board different from the first board and the first board. It is included in a second substrate box different from the one substrate box. Therefore, since the main control means and the sub control means are installed in different board boxes, it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of replacing the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

  In the gaming machine 9, the first board box is attached to the frame body, and the second board box is attached to the door body.

  According to the gaming machine 10, since the first board box is attached to the frame body and the second board box is attached to the door body, the positions where the main control means and the sub control means are installed can be separated. it can. Therefore, since it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of an act of exchanging the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

  The output to the outside by the first to third output means is, for example, a sound output by a sound output means such as a speaker provided in a gaming machine, a display output by a display means such as a lamp provided in the gaming machine, a game For example, output of a signal to an external device provided outside the machine.

  Note that the processing of S402 in FIG. 11 corresponds to the gaming machine and the main judging means of the gaming machine 1 according to claim 1, and the transmitting means of the gaming machine and gaming machine 1 according to claim 1 of S410 of FIG. 9 corresponds to the process of transmitting the door opening / closing command set by the process in the command output process of S211 of FIG. 9, and the process of S2608 of FIG. 29 is applicable to the gaming machine and the gaming machine 1 according to claim 1. 29 corresponds to the gaming machine and the first output means of the gaming machine 1, and the comparing means of the gaming machine and the gaming machine 3 according to claim 2 is S2206 of FIG. 25, the second output means of the gaming machine and the gaming machine 3 according to claim 2 corresponds to the processing of S2207 in FIG. 25, and the third output means of the gaming machine and the gaming machine 5 according to claim 3. FIG. Processing of S2307 is the case, as the selecting means of the game machine 6 process in S712 of FIG. 15 corresponds.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
11 Case (frame)
12 Front door (door)
22 Bracket (second locking member)
22a Front end portion 22b Rear end portion 22d Groove portion 23 Support metal fitting (first locking member)
24 Door detection sensor (detection means)
26 Door open sensor (detection means)
111 Display control device (sub-control means)
131 Main control device (main control means)
153e Open / close counter (change information storage means of main control means)
153f Previous door opening / closing flag (main opening / closing information storage means, main storage means)
153g This door opening / closing flag (main opening / closing information storage means, main storage means)
186c Command check timer (timer)
186e Previous door opening / closing flag (sub opening / closing information storage means, auxiliary storage means)
186f This time door opening / closing flag (sub-opening / closing information storage means, auxiliary storage means)
186g Open / close counter (change information storage means of sub-control means)
1024 Door detection sensor (detection means)
3012 Electrode (part of detection means)
3022 Electrode (part of detection means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A gaming machine exemplified as a slot machine has an outer shape formed by a substantially box-shaped housing (frame body) and a front door (door body) that opens and closes the housing. Further, in the gaming machine, the main controller for mainly controlling the game (main control means) is provided. Therefore, the main control device as one of the purposes of preventing that will be replaced illegally are configured to lock by a dedicated key to the front door and the housing.
Furthermore, provided the door sensor for detecting that the front door (door body) is opened with respect to the casing (frame), when it is detected that the front door is opened by the door detection sensor, There are some that let the outside know that the front door is open. By notifying that the front door is opened to the outside, it is possible to suppress the exchange of any fraud of the main control unit.

JP 2001-37948 A

However, for example, it may have a front door Ru is illegally replaced to main controller door sensor that has been opened is so is not performed notification be detected. In this case, there is a problem such that the notification be open the front door is not made.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, is intended that the primary control means to provide a game machine that can be broadcast and the like to the outside that is replaced incorrectly.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is a frame, a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the frame, and the door that is rotatable with respect to the frame. a hinge member for connecting to a main control means for performing main control of the game provided in the space to be closed the door body in a state of being closed relative to the frame member and by said frame body, from the main control unit and a sub control means for performing control in accordance with the instructions, and wherein the main control means and which is connected to both the sub-control means, for detecting the opening operation and closing operation of the door body relative to the frame comprising a detection means, the main control unit, when the detection result by said detecting means is in an open operation or closing operation of the door body, a door opening and closing signal based on that the door body is opened operation or closing operation the has a transmitting means for transmitting to said sub-control means, Serial sub-control means, when the result detected by said detecting means is in an open operation or closing operation of the door body, when unable to receive the door opening-closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of said main control means, to that effect having output means for outputting to the outside, the hinge member has a first having a shaft having a substantially cylindrical side surface, a first electrode is fixed to part of the outer periphery of the substantially cylindrical side surface of the support shaft, the A hinge member, an insertion portion that covers the first electrode in a state in which the support shaft of the first hinge member is inserted, and a second electrode that is fixed to a part of the inner periphery of the insertion portion; A state of contact between the first electrode and the second electrode is different between a state in which the door body is closed and a state in which the door body is opened. The detection means includes the first electrode and the second electrode. The state of the contact is adapted to detect the opening operation and closing operation of the door body relative to the frame.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , it is possible to output that there is a possibility that the main control means has been replaced.

It is a perspective view of the state which closed the front door of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine with a front door opened. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is the figure which showed roughly a part of structure which latches a front door with respect to a housing | casing. It is an expanded view of the belt-shaped belt which comprises each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning mode and a medal payout number. FIG. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric structure of the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU of the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process performed by MPU of the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of a power failure performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the door opening / closing command setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the winning probability setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the reel control processing performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the rotation start process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the payment determination process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the medal payout process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the bonus game process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the display timer interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command reception process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drive data output process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the door opening / closing monitoring process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed schematically a part of structure which latches the front door of 2nd Embodiment with respect to a housing | casing. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric constitution of the slot machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed schematically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a graph showing the relationship between the door detection sensor and time It is the figure which showed the connection part of the front door and housing | casing of the slot machine of a modification.

  In the following, an embodiment in the case of application to a spinning-reel type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. First, the structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the structure for locking the front door 12 to the housing 11. FIG. 5 is a development view of the belt-like belts constituting the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the number of medals paid out.

  First, the appearance and structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 includes a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left plate 11d, and a right plate 11e formed in a wooden plate shape, and the adjacent plates 11a to 11e are fixed by a fixing means such as adhesion. Thus, it is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened as a whole. In addition, each board 11a-11e may be comprised with a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel other than being comprised with a wooden panel, or it is comprised by forming in the box shape integral with a synthetic resin material or a metal material. May be. The casing 11 configured as described above is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

  A front door 12 as a front open / close door is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the left side plate 11d of the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a and 25b (see FIG. 3), and the support shafts 25a and 25b are provided with tapered shaft portions protruding upward. ing. On the other hand, the front door 12 is provided with a support fitting (not shown) provided with an insertion hole into which the shaft portion of the support shaft 25a, 25b is inserted corresponding to each support shaft 25a, 25b. Therefore, by placing the support fittings above the respective support shafts 25a and 25b and lowering the front door 12, the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support fittings. . Thereby, the front door 12 is supported so as to be rotatable about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the both support shafts 25a and 25b with respect to the housing 11, and the front opening side of the housing 11 is opened by the rotation. It can be closed or closed.

  A key cylinder 20 that locks the front door 12 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12. The key cylinder 20 is integrated with a locking device, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 20. Therefore, by releasing the locked state with the key cylinder 20, the front door 12 can be rotated and opened.

  A game panel 30 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The gaming panel 30 is formed so that three vertically long left display windows 31L, a middle display window 31M, and a right display window 31R are arranged side by side. The display windows 31L, 31M, 31R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. The display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R may be combined into a single display window.

  From each of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, a reel unit 41 (see FIG. 2) having a left reel 42L, a middle reel 42M, and a right reel 42R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape) is configured to be visible. Yes. The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may be configured as at least an endless belt, and are not limited to a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R correspond to the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is visible through the corresponding display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. Further, when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R.

  Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R includes a stepping motor 61L for the reel 42L (see FIG. 7), a stepping motor 61M for the middle reel 42M (see FIG. 7), and a stepping motor 61R for the reel 42R (see FIG. 7). ), And the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, that is, independently of each other.

  Each of the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; the same applies hereinafter). The rotational positions of the stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R, that is, the rotational positions of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are controlled.

  In addition, the game panel 30 is provided with a total of five combination lines, with three display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R connected to each other, three in parallel in the horizontal direction and two in diagonal directions. . Of course, the maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5, and the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (reverse V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be validated.

  Corresponding to these combination lines, effective line display sections 32, 33, and 34 are provided on the left side when viewed from the front of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. The first effective line display unit 32 is notified by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (center line) of the combination lines is activated. When the upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are activated, the second effective line display unit 33 is displayed and notified by lighting or the like. The third effective line display unit 34 is notified by lighting or the like when a pair of diagonal lines (downward right line and upward right line) of the combination lines is activated. A winning is awarded when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line, and a predetermined medal payout process, a transition process to a specific game, and the like are executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the design drawn on each belt of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, on each belt of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a plurality of, specifically, 21 symbols are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize which symbols are visible from the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R based on the number of pulses from when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 (see FIG. 7) is output, It is possible to perform a control such that the symbol is visible from the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R.

  Of the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R is mainly determined by the vertical lengths of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. Is limited to a predetermined number. In this embodiment, three reels are provided. For this reason, when all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player.

  Each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. Although numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to the respective reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, these are given for convenience of explanation, and are not actually attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. . However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  The symbols include “Replay” symbol (for example, left belt 20th), “Bell” symbol (for example, left belt 19th), “Youth” symbol (for example, left belt 18th), “7” symbol (for example, (Left belt 17th), “Cherry” design (eg, left belt 13th), “Chance” design (eg, left belt 12th), “Watermelon” design (eg, left belt 9th), “Reach” design ( For example, there are nine types: the 6th left belt) and the “Lucky” symbol (for example, 1st left belt). As shown in FIG. 5, the number of various symbols and the arrangement order are completely different in the belts wound around the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

  Each reel 42L, 42M, 42R of the reel unit 41 is an example of variable display means for variably displaying identification information, and constitutes a main display unit. However, the variable display means may have a configuration other than this as long as the symbol is variably displayed in the circumferential direction. For example, other mechanical reel configurations such as a type in which the belt is rotated instead of rotating may be used. In addition to the mechanical reel configuration, an electric display such as a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix display may be used. A device for variably displaying the identification information may be provided, and in this case, it is possible to give abundant variations in the display form.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the payout number regarding each symbol when winning is explained. As shown in FIG. 6, the small role winning in which medals are paid out includes watermelon winning, bell winning, and cherry winning. When stopped alongside the “Watermelon” symbol, “Watermelon” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol from the left on the active line, 15 medals are paid out as a watermelon prize, “Bell” symbol from the left, “Bell” on the active line In the case of stopping alongside the symbol and the “bell” symbol, eleven medals are paid out as a bell prize. When the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the active line, two medals are paid out as a cherry prize. That is, in the case of a cherry winning, any symbol that stops on the active line of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R may be any symbol. Therefore, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the position where the plurality of effective lines of the left reel 42L overlap (specifically, the upper stage or the lower stage), a cherry winning is established on each active line, and the overlapping effective The medal is paid out by multiplying the number of lines. As a result, in this embodiment, four medals are paid out.

  Further, there is a BB winning as a state transition winning in which the gaming state shifts. When the “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, the game state shifts to the BB game where the gaming state is the special gaming state as a BB winning. However, even if the “7” symbol stops along the left, middle and right on the active line, no medal is paid out. That is, when the combination of the “7” symbols is established on the active line, only the BB game is entered. In other words, it can be said that the “7” symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the BB game.

  Furthermore, when the “replay” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “replay” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, a re-game win is awarded. When the re-game winning is established, the medal payout and the state transition are not performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals.

  In addition, only when the gaming state is an RB game, which will be described later, when stopped alongside the “Replay” symbol, “Replay” symbol, “Chance” symbol from the left on the active line, and from the left on the active line When the “replay” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “lucky” symbol are stopped alongside, 15 medals are paid out as a JAC prize.

  In other cases, that is, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L does not stop on the active line and the combination of the symbols described above does not stop on the active line, the medal payout, the transition of the gaming state, etc. Not done at all. That is, the “chance” symbol and “lucky” symbol of the left reel 42L, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, the “young” symbol and the “reach” symbol of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R Not involved at all. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. As described above, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a “bell” symbol and a non-privileged symbol irrelevant to winning such as a “young” symbol, for example. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB symbol combination is a symbol BB winning combination, that is, a combination of “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 30, a start lever 71 is provided that is operated to start (change) all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R all at once (not necessarily simultaneously). It has been. The start lever 71 constitutes a fluctuation start means that is operated to start rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, that is, to start the symbol fluctuation display. The start lever 71 is a lever that is pushed by a hand (the direction in which it is pushed is not limited) when the player starts a game (game), and automatically returns to the original position after the hand is released by a built-in spring. To do. When the start lever 52 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 71, button-like stop switches 72, 73, 74 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R are provided. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 is arranged directly below the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R corresponding to the reels 42L, 42M, 42R to be stopped. The stop switches 72, 73, 74 constitute fluctuation stop means that are operated to stop fluctuation display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R.

  Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 42L starts rotating, and is stopped by lighting a lamp (not shown) during such a state. It is notified that the operation is possible, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a medal slot 75 for inserting medals as game media for playing games. The medal slot 75 constitutes a receiving port that can receive game media. Further, if attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 75 involves an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 75 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

  A button-like return switch 76 is provided below the medal slot 75. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 is jammed in the selector 83 (see FIG. 2). When the return switch 76 is pressed, the selector 83 is mechanically interlocked. The medal jammed in the selector 83 is returned from the medal discharge port 17.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a button-like first credit insertion switch 77 for inserting three virtual medals credited as game media at a time. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 77, a second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79 formed in a button shape smaller than the switch 77 are provided. The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Each of the credit insertion switches 77 to 79, together with the medal insertion slot 75, constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, if the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, each credit insertion switch 77 to 79 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. It can also be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

  The first credit insertion switch 77 has a built-in lamp as a light emitting member (not shown) to urge that the maximum number of medals that can be inserted per game (three) has not been reached. The lamp is turned on when the switch operation of the first credit insertion switch 77 is valid and prompts the operation of the switch 77. However, when there is no credited virtual medal or three medals have already been inserted. It is turned off under the circumstances. Here, instead of the above-described lighting, the player may make it easier to understand the prompt for medal insertion by blinking.

  A button-like changeover switch 80 is provided on the left side of the start lever 71. The change-over switch 80 is configured to be a toggle type that is turned on when pressed once, turned off when pressed again, and turned on / off every time the pressing operation is performed. The changeover switch 80 is operated to change the handling format of inserted medals inserted into the medal slot 75 more than necessary, or acquired medals returned to the player as a result of a predetermined game.

  When the change-over switch 80 is in the ON state, the “credit mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) and winning medals are stored and stored as credit medals. " When the changeover switch 80 is in the OFF state, the “direct mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals and winning medals are paid out as actual medals. If there is a credit medal when the credit mode is switched to the direct mode, the corresponding credit medal is paid out as an actual medal. Thus, the player can execute the game in a format according to his / her preference by switching between the credit mode and the direct mode. The changeover switch 80 constitutes a changeover operation means for changing over the input value and game value handling formats. Further, if paying attention to the function of paying out a credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the changeover switch 80 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game value. In addition to being configured to switch between the “credit mode” and the “direct mode” by operating the changeover switch 80, the virtual medal stored and stored is paid out when the changeover switch 80 is operated by always setting the “credit mode”. It may be made to function as only a settlement switch.

  Below the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R of the game panel 30, a remaining number display unit 35 that displays the number of medals that are activated and stored in the credit mode, and a special game state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus are displayed. At this time, for example, a game number display unit 36 for displaying the number of remaining games and an acquired number display unit 37 for displaying the number of acquired medals are provided. Although these display parts 35-37 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  Here, a procedure for betting medals will be described. In both the direct mode and the credit mode, a bet is placed when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 75 at the start of the game.

  That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the first effective line display section 32 is turned on, and the corresponding center line becomes the effective line, and the second medal is the medal insertion slot. When the number 75 is inserted, the second effective line display section 33 is turned on, and a total of three combination lines including an upper line and a lower line corresponding to the second effective line display section 33 become effective lines, respectively, and the third medal is a medal. When it is inserted into the insertion port 75, the third effective line display unit 34 is further turned on, and a total of five combination lines including a pair of diagonal lines corresponding thereto become effective lines.

  When four or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, the surplus medals exceeding three medals are discharged by the selector 83 (see FIG. 2) by the selector 83 (see FIG. 2) if the current mode is the direct mode. 2) and returned to the medal tray 18 from the medal discharge port 17. On the other hand, in the credit mode, it is stored inside the slot machine, and the number of stored sheets is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35. An upper limit number is determined for the number of stored sheets (for example, 50), and when a medal exceeding the number is inserted, it is returned from the medal discharge port 17 to the medal tray 18.

  In addition, when a game is played in the credit mode and the number of stored items is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35, the virtual number is displayed even when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed. A medal is inserted and a bet is placed.

  When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pressed, the numerical value displayed on the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by one as a virtual medal is inserted, and the first effective line display section 32 is displayed. Illuminates and the center line becomes the active line. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pressed, two numerical values displayed on the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented as two virtual medals are inserted, and the first valid line display unit 32 and The second effective line display section 33 is lit and a total of three combination lines become effective lines. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, three numerical values displayed on the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented as three virtual medals are inserted, and all the effective line display units 32 to 32 are decremented. 34 lights up and a total of five combination lines become effective lines.

  In addition, when the virtual medal to be inserted when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed is not stored, for example, when the display of the remaining number display unit 35 is 2, the first For example, when the credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, all the values in the remaining number display section 35 are decremented to 0, and a bet is made for the amount of virtual medals that can be inserted.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has a pair of left and right lamps 13 that light up or blink as the game progresses, and that emit various sound effects as the game progresses or inform the player of the game state. A speaker 14 and an auxiliary display unit 15 for providing various information to the player are provided. The lamp 13 is composed of an upper lamp 13a formed in a horizontally long shape along the upper side of the slot machine 10 and a throwing abnormality lamp 13b disposed on the lower left side of the upper lamp 13a.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 15 is configured by a liquid crystal display for the purpose of diversifying display contents and increasing the display effect. However, other displays such as a dot matrix display may be used. Good. The auxiliary display unit 15 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is caused by the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 15. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 15, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, and a display control device 111 for driving the auxiliary display unit 15 are provided. The shapes, positions, numbers, etc. of the lamps 13 and the speakers 14 are not limited to those described above.

  A lower plate 16 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 18. In addition, an ashtray 19 that can be reversed to the lower side on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 18.

  Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a state in which the front door 12 is opened from the state of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11 in a state in which the front door 12 is removed. The same parts as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the locking device provided on the front door 12 will be described. As described above, the front door 12 is provided with the key cylinder 20 as an unlocking operation unit, and the key cylinder 20 is integrated with the locking device, and the key cylinder 20 is operated by a predetermined key operation. The locked state is configured to be released.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a locking device is provided on the back side of the front door 12 on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis. The locking device extends vertically and is fixed to the front door 12, a key cylinder 20 provided so as to extend from the upper part of the base frame to the front of the front door 12, and moves vertically with respect to the base frame. It is provided with a long interlocking rod 21 assembled as possible. And only the key cylinder 20 is provided in the state which protruded ahead of the front door 12 among the locking devices. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the thin upper portion of the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 20 having a short overall length can be employed. In the present embodiment, Omlock (trade name) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 20.

  The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking saddle 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower saddle fittings 22 having a bowl shape. When the front door 12 is closed with respect to the casing 11, the saddle fitting 22 is supported on the casing 11 side. (See FIG. 3) and locked. In addition, the urging member 22 is provided with an urging member such as a coil spring for urging to the side maintaining the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the saddle fitting 22 is moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state with the support fitting 23 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

  Next, the selector 83 provided on the front door 12 will be described. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 described above are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by the selector 83 provided on the back surface of the front door 12. The selector 83 is provided with a medal passage switching member (not shown) to be described later, and the medal passage direction is switched between the discharge passage 82 side and the storage passage 81 side according to the state of the medal passage switching member. It is supposed to be. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is guided to the hopper device 91 housed in the housing 11. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 75a (see FIG. 7). On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 82 is guided to the medal tray 18 (refer to FIG. 1) from the medal discharge port 17 (refer to FIG. 1) provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player. Is done. The opening 94 is an opening through which medals paid out from the hopper device 91 pass, and the medals are paid out to the medal tray 18 via the discharge passage 82.

  Next, the internal structure of the housing 11 will be described. A hopper device 91 as a payout means for giving a medal to a player is provided below the inside of the housing 11. The hopper device 91 includes a storage tank 92 that stores medals and a payout device 93 that pays out medals to the player. The payout device 93 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 94 provided in the central right part of the discharge passage 82, and through the discharge passage 82, the medal tray 18 (FIG. (See 1). Further, a reserve tank 95 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 91 in order to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 92. A guide plate 96 for discharging medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95 is provided inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 96 is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 95.

  A power supply box 121 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 91. The power supply box 121 includes a power switch 122, a reset switch 123, a setting key insertion hole 124, and the like. The power switch 122 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 131 (see FIG. 7).

  The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the power shut-off is stored, but if the power switch 122 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 123, the backup data is reset. It has become so. If the reset switch 123 is pressed while the power switch 122 is on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 124 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the setting state (winning probability setting process) of the slot machine 10 can be changed from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” by the hole manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and rotating it. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 131 is attached to the back plate 11 c of the housing 11 above the reel unit 41. The main control device 131 is an MPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, time counting and synchronization. A main board including a clock circuit used in the case of planning, etc., and the main board is housed in a board box (first board box) as an encapsulation means made of a transparent resin material or the like. Yes. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other so as not to be opened by a sealing unit as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  Further, a door opening sensor 26 for detecting that the front door 12 is opened is attached to the top plate 11 a of the housing 11. The output of the door opening sensor 26 is turned on when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, and the output is turned off when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11. The door detection sensor 26 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111.

  Further, on the left side portion of the housing 11, support metal fittings 23 that are engaged with the metal fittings 22 provided on the front door 12 are provided up and down. The front door 12 is locked to the housing 11. Further, a door detection sensor 24 is provided below the support fitting 23 located above the support fitting 23. The door detection sensor 24 is a sensor for detecting a state in which the metal fitting 22 has moved when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11. The door detection sensor 24 is configured by a photo sensor, and when the metal fitting 22 moves, the optical path is blocked by the metal fitting 22 so that the output state changes. The positional relationship between the door detection sensor 24 and the metal fitting 22 and the operation of the metal fitting 22 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 4A is a view showing a state in which the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11 and the hook metal 22 is locked to the support metal 23. First, the shape of the metal fitting 22 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the metal fitting 22 is a portion located on the housing 11 side in a state where the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11, and a distal end portion that is the distal end side of the metal fitting 22. 22a, a rear end portion 22b which is a portion located on the front door 12 side and is a rear end side of the metal fitting 22, a connection portion 22c which connects the rear end portion 22b and the front end portion 22a at the lower end, and the connection It is comprised by the groove part 22d enclosed by the part 22c, the front-end | tip part 22a, and the rear-end part 22b.

  Further, in a state where the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11, the support fitting 23 is abutted against the inner side surface of the groove portion 22 d, and the saddle fitting 22 is locked to the support fitting 23. Therefore, when opening the front door 12 from the housing 11, it is necessary to open the front door 12 after moving the metal fitting 22 downward to release the locking with the support member 23. As described above, the metal fitting 22 can be moved by inserting a key into the key cylinder 20 and rotating (for example, rotating clockwise).

  As described above, the metal fittings 22 are provided at two locations on the front door 12 (see FIG. 2). When the upper and lower metal fittings 22 are manually moved downward, the other metal fitting 22 does not move in conjunction with it, and only the metal fitting 22 that has been manually moved moves. It is configured as follows. That is, only when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, the interlocking rod 21 operates and the upper and lower metal fittings 22 move in conjunction with each other. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of forcibly opening the front door 12 by forcibly moving the metal fitting 22 by a thin plate member (for example, a cell or the like).

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating a state in which a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated. As described above, when a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is operated to rotate, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward in conjunction with the rotation of the key, and the saddle fitting 22 is interlocked with the operation of the interlocking rod 21. Moving. When the saddle fitting 22 is moved (that is, when the opening operation of the front door 12 is started), the distal end portion 22a blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 24, and it is detected that the saddle fitting 22 has moved. . That is, the door detection sensor 24 is disposed within the movement range of the metal fitting 22.

  When the saddle fitting 22 is in the state shown in FIG. 4B, the locking of the groove 22d with the support fitting 23 is released, and the front door 12 can be rotated. When the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, the front door 12 is opened, so that the metal fittings 22 are simultaneously moved and come out of the optical path of the door detection sensor 24. As a result, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is not shielded by the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22, and the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes. That is, when the front door 12 is opened, the output of the door detection sensor 24 changes from off (state of FIG. 4 (a)) to on (state of FIG. 4 (b)), and then off (front face). The door 12 is opened).

  When the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 is released with the front door 12 opened, the interlocking rod 21 is moved upward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) and interlocked with the upward movement of the interlocking rod 21. Then, the metal fitting 22 moves upward, and the metal fitting 22 returns to the posture shown in FIG.

  Further, when the front door 12 is closed and the front door 12 is turned to the housing 11 side, the metal fitting 22 moves simultaneously with the front door 12 and the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 is supported. It contacts the metal fitting 23. And if the front door 12 is pushed further, the metal fitting 22 will move below. When the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the front end 22a of the saddle fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23, the saddle fitting 22 moves upward by the biasing force of the spring, and the groove 22d abuts on the support fitting 23 (FIG. 4). (State (a)), the closing operation of the front door 12 is completed. In addition, since the metal fitting 22 also moves when the front door 12 is closed, the output state of the door detection sensor 24 is also changed from the off state (the front door 12 is opened) to the on state (FIG. 4B). ), And then changes to OFF (state shown in FIG. 4A).

  As described above, the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes in the same manner both when the front door 12 is opened and when the front door 12 is closed. In the present embodiment, when the output of the door detection sensor 24 is switched from OFF to ON to OFF, it is determined that the front door 12 has been opened or closed (ie, opened or closed). Further, even when only the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 is performed without rotating the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves, so that the output state of the door detection sensor 24 changes and the opening or closing operation is performed. To be judged. In the present embodiment, if the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, the door detection sensor 24 continues to be on, so the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 cannot be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the housing 11, but the door detection sensor 24 may be attached to the front door 12. When the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12, the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is completed, and the output of the door detection sensor 24 is switched from on to off when the hand is released from the key. When the hand is released, it is determined that the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is completed.

  In addition, regardless of the position where the door detection sensor 24 is attached, a cover that covers the locking device (such as the metal fitting 22 and the interlocking rod 21) of the front door 12 is provided and fixed to a state where the metal fitting 22 has been moved by an unauthorized person. It is preferable to prevent fraud such as being performed. Further, when the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12, if the door detection sensor 24 is attached within the cover, an illegal act such as the installation of a member that shields the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is suppressed. Can do.

  Here, with reference to Fig.33 (a), the change of the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the state change of the front door 12 are demonstrated. FIG. 33A is a graph showing the relationship between the change in the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the time when the state of the front door 12 changes.

  Before the time t1 shown in FIG. 33A, the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. Therefore, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is off. When the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves and blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 (time t <b> 1). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned on at time t1.

  During the period from time t1 to time t2, the state in which the key cylinder 20 is being rotated is continued. Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 by the metal fitting 22 is used. Is blocked (time t2). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned off at time t2.

  During the period from time t2 to time t3, the state where the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 is continued. After that, when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, as described above, The tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 contacts the support metal 23, and the metal fitting 22 moves downward, and the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is shielded by the metal fitting 22 (time t3). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned on at time t3.

  Between time t3 and time t4, the front door 12 is pushed into the housing 11, and then the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the tip 22a of the metal fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23. Then, the metal fitting 22 moves upward and the shielding of the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is released (time t4). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 24 is turned off at time t4.

  As described above, the output of the door detection sensor 24 changes from off to on and further off when the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 and when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11. To do.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main controller 131 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 151 which is arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 (see FIG. 2), the MPU 151 is connected to a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. Has been. The main control device 131 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 131, there are a start detection sensor 71a for detecting the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, 74a for individually detecting the operations of the stop switches 72, 73, 74, and a medal slot. An inserted medal detection sensor 75a for detecting medals inserted from 75, credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, 79a for individually detecting operations of the respective credit insertion switches 77, 78, 79, and an adjustment for detecting an operation of the adjustment switch 80. Detection sensor 80 a, reel index sensor 55 that individually detects the rotational position (origin position) of each reel 42, payout detection sensor 91 a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 91, and reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset switch 123 123a, set in the setting key insertion hole 124 A setting key detection sensor 124a for detecting that a key is inserted and turned ON, and a door detection sensor 24 for detecting a metal fitting 22 that operates (moves) when the front door 12 opens and closes with respect to the housing 11. Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 26 for detecting that the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the MPU 151 via the input / output port 155. It is like that. Note that the door detection sensor 24 and the door opening sensor 26 are also connected to the display control device 111.

  The inserted medal detection sensor 75a is actually composed of a plurality of sensors. That is, the storage passage 81 (see FIG. 2) from the medal slot 75 (see FIG. 1) to the hopper device 91 (see FIG. 2) is configured so that medals can pass in one row. In addition, a first sensor (not shown) is provided in the storage passage 81, and a second sensor (not shown) and a third sensor (not shown) are arranged on the downstream side more than the medal width. They are provided in close proximity (adjacent to the extent that a state where the same medal is simultaneously detected at least at one time) is provided, and the inserted medal detection sensor 75a is constituted by each of the first to third sensors.

  The main control device 131 monitors the time from the first sensor to the second sensor, and if the elapsed time exceeds a predetermined time, the main control device 131 considers that there has been a medal clogging or fraud and makes an error. If an error occurs, an error notification is performed and an operation by the player until the error is canceled is invalidated.

  The main controller 131 also monitors the order in which the second sensor and the third sensor are turned on / off, both the second and third sensors are off, only the second sensor is on, and both the second and third sensors are both on. The medal is normally taken in only when the order is on, only the third sensor is on, both the second and third sensors are off, and the time for shifting to each on / off switching is within a predetermined time. Judgment, otherwise it is an error. The reason for this is to prevent a fraud in which the medal is reciprocated near the inserted medal detection sensor 75a and misidentified as a medal inserted in addition to the clogging of the medal in the storage passage 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Further, a power supply device 161 is connected to the input side of the main control device 131 via an input / output port 155. The power supply device 161 includes a power supply unit 161 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 131, a power failure monitoring circuit 161 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 161b is for monitoring the power cutoff state and generating a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also at the time of power cutoff by the power switch 122. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 161a, and determines that the power supply is shut off when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 151 and the input / output port 155, and the MPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. Although details will be described later, the power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 111.

  The power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 131 even when the output voltage is reduced to less than 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main controller 131 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 131, each of the effective line display units 32, 33, 34, the credit display unit 35, the remaining acquired number display unit 36, the acquired number display unit 37, and the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is rotated. Stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R, a medal passage switching solenoid 83 provided in the selector 84, a hopper device 91, a display control device 111, an external concentration terminal plate 171 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. The output port 155 is connected.

  The display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and includes a substrate on which MPU, ROM, RAM, and the like for driving these are integrated. Then, after receiving a signal from the main control device 131, the display control device 111 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15. Therefore, the display control device 111 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 131 that is a main base that manages and manages games. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the display control apparatus 111 controls the various display parts 32-37.

  The MPU 151 described above stores various control programs executed by the MPU 151 and a ROM 152 storing fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 152. In addition to the RAM 153 for securing the area, as is well known, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 152 and the RAM 153 constitute a main memory as storage means. For example, the programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 22 are described above as a part of the control program. Stored in the ROM 152.

  The RAM 153 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 even after the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 153 stores a memory for temporarily storing various data, a setting information storage area 153a used when setting a winning probability, a game state such as a BB game, and various data used during a BB game. BB information storage area 153b for playing, game information storage area 153c for storing various data used in each game, power failure flag 153d, open / close counter 153e, previous door open / close flag 153f, current door open / close A flag 153g, a transmission command storage area 153h, and a backup area are provided.

  The power failure flag 153d is a flag indicating whether or not a power failure has occurred. The power failure flag 153d is turned on in step S102 of the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 9) executed when a power failure occurs, and is executed for the first time after the occurrence of the power failure. This is turned off in the process of S513 of the main process (see FIG. 13).

  The opening / closing counter 153e is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is performed in S407 of the door opening / closing command setting process (see FIG. 12). Each time is detected, 1 is added. The number of times stored in the open / close counter 153e is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S407 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  The previous and current door opening / closing flags 153f and 153g are flags indicating whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f indicates the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12. The current door open / close flag 153g indicates the current open / close state of the front door 12. The current door opening / closing flag 153g is turned on or off in the processing of S403 and S404 of the door opening / closing command setting processing (see FIG. 12), and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f is the processing of S410 of the door opening / closing command setting processing. The value of the flag 153g is stored as it is.

  The transmission command storage area 153h is an area for storing a command to be transmitted to the display control device 111, and is configured in a known ring buffer format in this embodiment. The commands stored in the transmission command storage area 153h are read in the stored order and transmitted to the display control device 111 when the process of S211 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed.

  The backup area stores the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shut down by operating the power switch 122 (see FIG. 2); the same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 122. The same applies hereinafter), the slot machine 10 can return to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. It is like that. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 11), and the restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process (see FIG. 13) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 161b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 151 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing as flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 111 of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 111. In the description of FIG. 8, the detailed description of the portions described in the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 7 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 that is arithmetic processing means. Yes.

  The MPU 181 is executed by the MPU 181, a signal latch circuit 182 that latches a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main controller 131, a latch circuit 184 that latches a clock signal generated from the clock circuit 183 every 1 msec, and the MPU 181. ROM 185 storing various control programs and fixed value data for driving upper lamp 13 and the like, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in ROM 185 A RAM 186 for securing is connected. Note that a one-chip microcomputer in which the above-described ROM 185, RAM 186, signal latch circuit 182 and clock circuit 183 are incorporated in the MPU may be used.

  The MPU 181 is connected to a power supply device 161, a door detection sensor 24, a door opening sensor 26, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, and an auxiliary display unit 15 through an input / output port 187. The power supply device 161 is configured such that a power failure signal is input when the drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 131, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 via the input / output port 187. . Hereinafter, the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect unit.

  The RAM 186 includes a received command storage area 186a, an interrupt timer counter 186b, a command check timer 186c, a door open / close command reception flag 186d, a previous door open / close flag 186e, a current door open / close flag 186f, and an open / close counter 186g. And are provided.

  The received command recording area 186a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 131, and stores the command received in the process of S2201 of the command receiving process (see FIG. 25).

  The interrupt timer counter 186b is a counter that sets the timing for executing the drive data output process. The interrupt timer counter 186b is incremented by 1 in the process of S2002 of the display timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the drive data output process (see FIG. 27). It is cleared by the process of S2409.

  The command check timer 186c is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the opening operation of the front door 12 is detected, and the value 10 is set in the processing of S2607 of the door opening / closing monitoring processing (see FIG. 29), and the processing of S2611 1 is subtracted.

  The door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is a flag indicating whether or not a door opening / closing command has been received from the main controller 131. When the door opening / closing command is received in the command reception processing (see FIG. 25), the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2204. In step S2614 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), the process is turned off.

  The previous and current door opening / closing flags 186e and 186f are flags indicating whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 186e indicates the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12. The current door open / close flag 186f indicates the current open / close state of the front door 12. The current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned on or off in the processing of S2603 and S2604 in the door opening / closing monitoring processing (see FIG. 29), and the previous door opening / closing flag 186e is processed in S2609 of the door opening / closing monitoring processing. The value of is stored as it is.

  The opening / closing counter 186g is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11. The opening / closing counter 186g is incremented by 1 in the process of S2608 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29). The number of times stored in the open / close counter 186g is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S2608 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the MPU 151 in the main controller 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 22. The processing of the MPU 151 is roughly divided into a main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal. For convenience of explanation, the NMI interrupt process and the timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The NMI interruption process is executed when the main controller 131 receives a power failure signal generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 161b of the power supply device 161 through the NMI terminal when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the NMI interrupt process is executed, the process being executed (including the interrupt process) is stopped.

  In the NMI interrupt processing, first, the data of the used register provided in the MPU 151 is saved in the backup area provided in the RAM 153 (S101). Subsequently, the power failure flag 153d is turned on (S102), the data saved in the backup area of the RAM 153 is restored to the use register of the MPU 151 again (S103), and this process is terminated. If the power failure flag can be turned on without destroying the data in the used register of the MPU 151, the save and restore processing to the backup area can be omitted.

  The MPU 181 of the display control apparatus 111 executes the same process as the NMI interrupt process described above, but a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The timer interrupt process is executed by causing the MPU 151 of the main control device 131 to generate a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  When the timer interrupt process is executed, first, a register saving process is executed (S201). In the register saving process of S201, the values of all registers in the MPU 151 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 153.

  In the process of S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag 153d is turned on. If the power failure flag is turned on (S202: Yes), the power failure process is executed (S203), and the power failure flag 153d is turned off. If yes, the process proceeds to S204 without executing the power failure process. Hereinafter, the power failure process (S203) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the power failure process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. Since the power failure process is performed immediately after the register saving process in the timer interrupt process, other interrupt processes can be executed without interruption. Therefore, for example, during the process of transmitting various commands, during the process of reading the switch state (on / off), the process at the time of power failure is not executed by interrupting each process. It is no longer necessary to create a power failure processing program that also takes into account This simplifies the processing program for power failure processing and reduces the program capacity. This also applies to a processing program for power recovery processing described later.

  When the process at the time of power failure is executed, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed (S301). If the transmission has not been completed (S301: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 to terminate the command transmission. In this way, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed at the initial stage of the power failure process, the transmission process is prioritized when the transmission is incomplete, and the power failure process is executed after the unit command transmission process is completed. By doing so, it is no longer necessary to construct a power failure processing program that takes into account that power failure processing is executed during command transmission. As a result, the power failure processing program can be simplified and the capacity of the ROM 152 can be reduced.

  If the command transmission is completed in the process of S301 (S301: Yes), the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 151 is stored in the backup area in the RAM 153 (S302). Thereafter, a RAM determination value, which will be described later, is cleared as a stop process, and the output state of the output port in the input / output port 155 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (S303). Further, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area (S304). The RAM determination value is specifically a 2's complement of the checksum at the work area address of the RAM 153. By storing the RAM determination value in the backup area, the checksum of the RAM 153 becomes zero. By setting the checksum of the RAM 153 to 0, subsequent RAM access is prohibited (S305).

  After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 153 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. If the power outage signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered.

  The power supply unit 161a of the power supply device 161 holds the output of the stabilization voltage (5 volts) used as the drive voltage for the control system for a time sufficient to execute the above-described NMI interrupt processing and power failure processing. It is comprised so that. In the present embodiment, the drive voltage is continuously output for 30 msec.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process will be described. In the process of S204, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is executed (S204). In the process of S205, an interrupt end declaration process for giving an interrupt permission to the MPU 151 itself is executed (S205). In the process of S206, in order to rotate the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors 61L to 61R, which are the respective rotary drive motors, is executed (S206). In the process of S207, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring the state of various sensors (see FIG. 7) connected to the input / output port 155 is executed (S207). In the process of S208, a door opening / closing command setting process is executed (S208). The door opening / closing command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing door opening / closing command setting processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131. When the door opening / closing command setting process is executed in S208 of the timer interrupt process, a value input from the door detection sensor 24 is acquired (S401), and the door detection sensor 24 is turned on based on the acquired value. It is confirmed whether it is (S402). The value input from the door detection sensor 24 is, for example, a voltage value. If the value is 5 V or more, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is shielded by the metal fitting 22, and the door detection sensor 24 is determined to be on. If the value is less than 5 V, the optical path of the door detection sensor 24 is not shielded by the metal fitting 22, and it is determined that the door detection sensor 24 is off.

  If the door detection sensor 24 is on in the process of S402 (S402: Yes), the current door open / close flag 135g for storing the open / closed state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S403), and the door is detected. If the sensor 24 is in an off state (S402: No), the current door opening / closing flag 135g is turned off (S404), and the process proceeds to S405.

  In the process of S405, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening / closing flag 135f that stores the previous open / closed state of the front door 12 is ON (S405), and if the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is OFF (S405: No). ), The process proceeds to S410. As described above, when the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF. Therefore, when the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is off, the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 has not been started (already opened or closed), so the processing of S406 to S409 is not executed. The process proceeds to S410.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening / closing flag 135f is turned on in S405 (S405: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is started. Next, the current door opening / closing flag 135g is turned on. It is confirmed whether or not (S406). As described above, when the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF, so that the current door open / close flag 135g is ON (S406). : Yes) Since the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is still continued, the process proceeds to S410 without executing the processes in S407 to S409.

  On the other hand, if the current door opening / closing flag 135g is OFF in the processing of S406 (S406: No), the front door 12 is opened or closed with respect to the housing 11, and therefore the value of the opening / closing counter 135e is set. 1 is added (S407), and a door opening / closing command (a signal including a door opening / closing signal and an opening / closing signal) is generated based on the value of the opening / closing counter 135e (S408).

  Then, the door opening / closing command created in the process of S408 is stored in a predetermined area of the transmission command storage area 135h (S409), and the process proceeds to S410. In this embodiment, the door opening / closing command stored in the transmission command storage area 135h is composed of 2 bytes, and the first byte indicates that the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11. Information is stored, and information indicating the number of times the front door 12 has been opened and closed is stored in the second byte. Therefore, the display control device 111 can recognize that the front door 12 has been opened and closed and the number of times that the front door 12 has been opened and closed.

  In the process of S410, when the door open / close command setting process is executed next, the value of the current door open / close flag 135g is stored in the previous door open / close flag 135f in order to confirm the open / closed state of the front door 12 (S410). This process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the processing after S209 of the timer interrupt processing will be described. In the process of S209, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is executed (S209). In the process of S210, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 171 is executed (S210). In the process of S211, a command output process for transmitting a command or the like to the display control device 111 is executed (S211). In the process of S212, a segment data setting process for setting the segment data displayed on the remaining number display unit 35, the game number display unit 36, and the acquired number display unit 37 is executed (S212). In the process of S213, the segment data display process which supplies the segment data set by the segment data setting process to each display part 35-37, and displays a corresponding number, a symbol, etc. is performed (S213). In the process of S214, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 155 is executed (S214). In the process of S215, a register restoration process is executed to restore the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous process of S201 to the corresponding register in the MPU 151 (S215). Thereafter, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed (S216), and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The main process is a process executed after the power is turned on, and is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or turning on the power switch 122.

  When the main process is executed, first, as an initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 151 and an interrupt mode for permitting the interrupt process is set. Thereafter, a register group in the MPU 151 and an I / O device are set. Etc., various settings are made (S501).

  When the initialization process is completed in the process of S501, it is confirmed whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 124 and is turned ON (S502). More specifically, it is determined whether an ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 124a. If the setting key is turned on (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and all data stored in the RAM 153 is cleared as a forced RAM clear process (S503), and the winning probability setting is performed. Processing is executed (S504), and then normal processing is executed.

  Here, the winning probability setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a winning probability setting process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. The winning probability setting process is a process (S504) that is executed when the operator inserts a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and performs an ON operation. The winning probability setting process is a process for setting whether to execute internal processing based on the six-stage winning probability from “setting 1” to “setting 6” provided in the slot machine 10.

  When the winning probability setting process is executed, first, the next timer interruption is permitted (S601), the current setting value is read (S602), and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 35 based on the read setting value. (S603). However, in the process immediately after the setting key is inserted and turned ON, the data in the RAM 153 is cleared by the previous forced RAM clear process, so the set value displayed on the credit display unit 35 is “1”. is there.

  When the set value is displayed on the credit display unit 35, it is confirmed whether or not the start lever 71 is operated (S604). If the start lever 71 is not operated (S604: No), the reset switch 123 is operated. It is confirmed whether or not (S605). If the reset switch 123 is not operated in the process of S605 (S605: No), the process returns to S603 as it is, and if the reset switch 123 is operated (S605: Yes), the set value is updated by 1 ( S606), the process returns to S603. That is, in the process of S606, each time the reset switch 123 is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 35. When the reset switch 123 is operated when the set value is “6”, the set value is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the start lever 71 is operated in the process of S604 (S604: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the setting key is continuously turned on (S607). If the setting key has been turned on continuously, the process waits as it is (S607: Yes). If the setting key has been turned on (S607: No), the next timer interrupt is prohibited (S607: No). S608). Thereafter, the current set value is saved (S609), data other than the set value stored in the RAM 153 is cleared (S610), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the main process will be described. When the setting key is not inserted in the process of S502 (S502: No), the power recovery process shown in S506 and thereafter is performed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is shut off. Therefore, in the power recovery process, it is necessary to first check whether the data in the RAM 153 is normal.

  Therefore, in the process of S506, it is confirmed whether or not the set value is normal (S506). Specifically, when the set value is any one of 1 to 6, it is determined to be normal, and when it is 0 or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal in the process of S506 (S506: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag 153d is turned on (S507). If the power failure flag is turned on (S507: Yes) Further, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (S508). Specifically, the value of the checksum in the RAM 153 is checked to check whether the value is normal, that is, whether the value of the checksum including the RAM determination value is 0. If the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the data in the RAM 153 is normal.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the RAM determination value is normal (S508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S509, and the stack pointer value stored in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 151. The stack state is restored to the state before the power is shut off (S509). Next, a power recovery command for transmitting the power recovery process is transmitted to the display control device 111 (S510), the game state is stopped and the automatic settlement setting storage process is performed (S511), and various sensors such as the start detection sensor 71a are executed. Is initialized (S512). After the above processing is completed, the power failure flag is turned off (S513), and the processing returns to the address before the power is shut off. Specifically, the process returns to the timer interrupt process described above, and the watchdog timer clear process (S204) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S506 to S508, either is No, that is, the set value is abnormal (S506: No), the power failure flag that is turned on when the power is shut off is not turned on (S507: No), or When the RAM determination value is abnormal (S508: No), there is a high possibility that the data in the RAM 153 has been destroyed. In such a case, the operation prohibiting process shown in S514 to S516 is executed.

  As the operation prohibition process, first, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited (S514), all output ports in the input / output port 155 are cleared (S515), and all actuators connected to the input / output port 155 are turned off. Control to the state. Thereafter, an error notification process for notifying the occurrence of an error to the hall manager or the like using the upper lamp 13 or the like is executed (S516). This operation prohibition state is maintained until the above-described winning probability setting process is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the normal process is executed, the next timer interruption is permitted (S701), and the pre-start process for enabling the game is executed (S702). In the pre-start process of S702, the setting state of stop and automatic checkout is stored in the RAM 153 and waits until the display control device 111 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 111 and the like is completed, the game management process shown in S703 and thereafter is executed.

  In the process of S703, data stored in the game information storage area 153c of the RAM 153 (for example, a random number used in the previous game) is cleared (S703), and then a start waiting process is executed (S704). In the start waiting process of S704, it is confirmed whether or not a re-game winning is established in the previous game. If a re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and an insertion completion command is set to end the start waiting process.

  Here, the insertion completion command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp the completion of the automatic insertion. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 35. That is, when a re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

  If the re-game winning is not established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result of the sensor monitoring process (S207) of the timer interruption process, and an abnormality occurs. If the error occurs, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Although details will be described later, such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 123 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 80 has been operated. If the settlement switch 80 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal And set the checkout command.

  Here, the settlement command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the credited virtual medal is being returned. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 80 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal insertion or credit insertion switch 77 to 79 has been operated. A medal insertion process for setting an effective line is performed, and an insertion command is set to end the start waiting process. Here, the insertion command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that a betting operation has been performed.

  After completion of the start waiting process in S704, it is confirmed whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number (3 in the present embodiment) (S705). If the bet number of medals has reached a specified number, (S705: Yes), it is confirmed whether the start lever 71 is operated and a start command is generated (S706). When the number of bets on medals has not reached the specified number in the process of S705 (S705: No), or when the start command is not generated in the process of S706 (S706: No), the process of waiting for start in S704 Referring back to FIG. 4, the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  If a start command is generated in the processing of S706 (S706: Yes), the medal path switching solenoid 83 is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet reception (S707), and a start command is set (S708). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that a start command has been generated.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening / closing flag 153g is on (S709). If the current door opening / closing flag 153g is off (S709: No), then the door opening sensor 26 is on. If the door opening sensor 26 is also off (S710: No), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is not rotated, and the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, the process proceeds to S712.

  On the other hand, when the door opening / closing flag 153g is turned on or the door opening sensor 26 is turned on (S709: Yes or S710: Yes), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is rotated. Or, since the game has been executed with the front door 12 opened, an error notification setting process is executed (S711), and the process returns to S703. The error notification setting process of S711 is a process of setting a notification command for notifying the display control device 111 that the game has been started with the front door 12 being opened.

  In the processes after S712, the lottery process (S712), the reel control process (S713), the medal payout process (S714), and the bonus game process (S715) are executed in sequence, the process returns to S703, and the processes of S703 to S715 are repeated. Do.

  In the normal process, various commands such as the input completion command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 111. The command transmission to the display control device 111 is performed in the command output process S210 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  Here, a case where a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and a game is started while being rotated, or a case where a game is started while the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 will be described. . As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that the main controller 131 has been replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, an error notification is performed when the front door 12 is opened and closed. . Therefore, when the fraudster knows that error notification will be performed when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the front door 12 is opened without closing after the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one. It is conceivable to start the game without changing the output of the door detection sensor 24 by inserting a key into the key cylinder 20 and rotating it.

  However, in the normal process, when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened, the lottery process and the reel control process, the medal Since the payout process and the bonus game process are not executed, the main game is started in the main controller 131 in a state where the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. Can be prevented. Further, when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened, some illegal act is performed in the slot machine 10. Although the error notification setting process is executed, the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. It can be recognized that the game has started.

  In addition, when the process of S709 or the process of S710 is Yes, you may comprise so that it may transfer to the process of S712, without performing the error alert setting process of S711. This is because the front door 12 is closed if the fraudster recognizes that the game cannot be executed when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is left open. After that, the game is executed. As will be described later, in the display control device 111, when there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced with an unauthorized one, a process for notifying the fact is executed, so the front door 12 is closed and the game is executed. This is because it is possible to let outsiders recognize fraud before being done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the lottery process in S712 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a lottery process executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131, and FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a lottery table.

  When the lottery process is executed, a random number used for determining whether or not the winning combination is made in the random number creating process is created (S801). The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 71 is operated, the hardware latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. After confirming the operation of the start lever 71, the MPU 151 stores the value latched by the hardware in the game information storage area 153c of the RAM 153. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly generate a random number at the timing when the start lever 71 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 71 is operated.

  When the random number generation process of S801 is completed, a lottery table for determining whether or not the game is successful is selected based on the current setting state and gaming state of the slot machine 10 (S802). Here, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is any one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When “setting 1”, the lottery table having the lowest BB winning probability is selected, and when “setting 6” is set. The lottery table having the highest BB winning probability is selected.

  Here, the lottery table will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a lottery table selected under the normal state of “Setting 1”. In the lottery table, the same number of index values IV as the number of winning combinations is set. That is, under the normal state, five types of winnings of replay, cherry, bell, watermelon, and BB can occur (see FIG. 6), so five index values IV of 1 to 5 are set. Each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination, and a point value PV is set. In each lottery table in the slot machine 10, the point value PV corresponding to the BB combination is set larger as the lottery table has a higher set value.

  In the process of S803, the index value IV is set to 1 (S803), and a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set (S804). In the determination value setting, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value created in S801 is used as the current determination value DV, and a new determination is made by adding a point value PV corresponding to 1 as the current index value IV to the random value. Let it be the value DV.

  When the determination value DV is set in the process of S804, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (S805). In the determination of whether or not a winning combination is made, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the determining value DV exceeds 65535 (S805: Yes), the winning flag of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set ( S806). Incidentally, when the winning flag is a small role winning flag or a re-game winning flag, these winning flags are reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set (see S703 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the BB winning flag, the BB winning flag is reset as one of the conditions that the combination of the BB symbols is established on the active line. That is, the BB winning flag may be valid for a plurality of games. In addition, in the success / failure determination of the winning combination after the next game carrying over the BB winning flag, the determination of whether or not the small combination or replay is made is performed, but the determination of whether or not the BB is related is not performed.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in the processing of S805 (S805: No), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S807), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a role to be determined as appropriate (S808). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table.

  If it is determined in the process of S808 that there is a winning combination to be determined (S808: Yes), the process returns to S804 to continue the determination of winning combination. At this time, in the process of S804, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous combination is a correct determination value DV. In the process of S805, whether or not the winning combination is determined is performed based on the determination value DV. Incidentally, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 17 is selected, the BB winning probability is about 1/300. On the other hand, the replay and small role winning probabilities are set higher than the BB winning probability, the replay winning probability is about 1 / 7.3, the bell winning probability is about 1 / 7.0, and the cherry and watermelon winning probabilities The probability is 1/128.

  After the winning flag is set in the process of S806, or when there is no winning combination that should be determined in S808 (S808: No), this means that the winning determination of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, a set value command is set (S809), and a lottery result command is set (S810). Here, the set value command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp the current set value, and the lottery result command is a display control device in order to grasp the result of the combination determination. 111 is a command transmitted to 111.

  Thereafter, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is executed (S811), and this process ends. Here, the slip table is a table in which it is determined how much the reel is slid (rotated) and stopped after the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed. In other words, the slip table is a symbol that reaches the base point position (on the lower line in this embodiment) when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed, and a stop symbol that actually stops at the base point position. This is a stop data group with a defined relationship.

  In the slot machine 10, when the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated, when the reaching symbol is stopped as it is, when the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, it is stopped after sliding for two symbols. In this case, five patterns are prepared as a reel stop mode, in the case of stopping after sliding for three symbols, and for stopping after sliding for four symbols. This closely matches the timing at which the player operates the stop switches 72 to 74 and the symbol arrangement (hereinafter referred to as “stop appearance”) that stops in a visible range from each display window 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a device for associating. That is, by stopping the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R until the specified time (190 msec) has elapsed from the timing at which the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated, it is as if the stop outcome has been determined by the player's operation. It is possible to make a player have a good impression. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to 4 symbols, it becomes possible to stop combinations of symbols corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery on the active line as much as possible within the specified time. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the reel control process executed in S713 of the main process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131. In order to facilitate understanding, the description will be made in accordance with the progress of the actual game and will be described with reference to the symbol arrangement of FIG. 5 as appropriate.

  When the reel control process is executed, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is performed (S901). This rotation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the rotation start process executed by the MPU 151 of the main controller 131. When the rotation start process is executed, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game (S1001), and the wait time has elapsed. If not (S1001: No), when a wait wait command is set (S1002), the process waits until the wait time elapses. Here, the wait-wait command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the wait time has not elapsed.

  On the other hand, if the wait time has elapsed in S1001 (S1001: Yes), the wait time for the next game is reset (S1003). Thereafter, a wait end command is set (S1004), and the bet number of medals to be output to the external concentration terminal board 171 in the process of S209 of the timer interrupt process is set (S1005). Here, the wait end command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that the wait time has elapsed.

  In the process of S1006, a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the game information storage area 153c is executed (S1006). By performing this process, the acceleration process of the stepping motors 61L to 61R is started in the stepping motor control process (S206) of the timer interrupt process, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 71, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may not immediately start rotating.

  In the process of S1007, a rotation information command is set (S1007). Here, the rotation information command is a command transmitted to cause the display control device 111 to grasp the rotation status of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. Next, in the processing of S1008, it is confirmed whether or not each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is rotating at a constant speed (S1008), and if not rotating at a constant speed (S1008: No). The process waits until each reel 42L, 42M, 42R rotates at a constant speed. Thereafter, when each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R rotates at a constant speed (S1008: Yes), a constant speed rotation command is set (S1009), and this process ends.

  Here, the constant speed rotation command is a command transmitted to make the display control device 111 know that the rotation speed of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has become constant. Further, the MPU 151 indicates that when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation can be performed by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 72 to 74. To inform.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the processing after S902 of the reel control processing will be described. In the processing of S902, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 72 to 74 has been operated to generate a reel stop command, and more specifically whether or not an ON signal has been received from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. Confirmation is made (S902), and if a stop command is not generated (S902: No), the system waits until a stop command is generated.

  On the other hand, if any of the stop switches 72 to 74 is operated and a stop command is generated in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, one reel It is confirmed whether or not the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated when only the motor is rotating (S903).

  If any of the stop switches 72 to 74 is operated while all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotating in the process of S903 (S903: No), the current stop command is the first stop command. Means the first change processing of the slip table (S904). The first sliding table changing process is a changing process of the sliding table that is performed before the reels are stopped based on the generation of the stop command.

  After the smooth table first change process of S904 is completed, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the lower line at this timing is confirmed (S905). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower line is confirmed by the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 is output.

  In the processing of S906, the slip amount of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the compressed data of the symbol number corresponding to the reaching symbol among the slip tables set in the slip table storage area of the game information storage area 153c (S906). The symbol number of the symbol to be actually stopped on the lower line is determined (S907). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol (S908), and waits until they are equal (S908: No). (S908: Yes), a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is executed (S909).

  In the process of S910, a rotation information command is set to cause the display control device 111 to grasp the current rotation state of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R (S910), and then a stop symbol command is set (S911). Here, the stop symbol command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp a symbol stopped in a range (upper, middle, lower) visible from the display window.

  In the process of S912, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (S912). When the above-described processing of S903 to S911 is performed based on the first stop command, since the two reels are still rotating (S912: No), the sliding table second change processing is executed (S913). The sliding table second changing process is a sliding table changing process performed after the reels are stopped.

  When the slip table second change process of S913 is completed, the process returns to S902, and the processes of S903 to S913 are repeatedly executed until all reels are stopped. When all the reels are stopped (S912: Yes), a payout determination process (S914) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the payout determination process executed in the process of S914 of the reel control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a payout determination process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the payout determination process is executed, the active line is confirmed based on the current gaming state (S1101). Although details will be described later, this is because the active line is changed from 5 lines to 1 line (medium line) when the game state shifts to the BB game. Next, a combination of symbols on a predetermined effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower line of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R (S1102), and it is confirmed whether or not a winning is achieved (S1102). S1103).

  If a winning is established in the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning winning combination matches the winning flag set in the lottery processing (S1104). If the winning combination combination and the winning flag match in the processing of S1104 (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1107, and if the winning combination combination and the winning flag do not match (S1104: No), The slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed (S1105).

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the reset switch 123 has been operated (S1106), and waits until the reset switch 123 is operated (S1106: No). When the reset switch 123 is operated (S1106: Yes), the process returns from the error state and proceeds to the process of S1107, and the subsequent processes are started.

  In the process of S1107, the winning combination is set (S1107), and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is set in the expected payout number storage area of the game information storage area 153c (S1108). Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the payout determination has been completed for all the active lines (S1109). If not completed (S1109: No), the processing returns to S1102. That is, in this embodiment, when three medals are bet and five effective lines are set, it is sequentially determined whether or not a winning is achieved for each effective line.

  For example, when the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the upper line, 2 is set as the number of payouts in the processing of S1102 to S1108 for the upper line, and the payout is performed in the processing of S1102 to S1108 for the lower right line 2 is set again as the planned number. As a result, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the upper line, 4 is set as the expected payout number, and four medal payouts are performed in the medal payout process described later.

  If the payout determination is completed for all active lines in the processing of S1109 (S1109: Yes), a winning command is set (S1110), a winning line command is set (S1111), and this processing is terminated. Here, the winning command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp which winning has been established, and the winning line command indicates which active line the winning has been established. This is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 for grasping.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the medal payout process executed in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  When the medal payout process is executed, it is confirmed whether or not the planned payout number stored in the payout number storage area is 0 (S1201). If the planned payout number is 0 (S1201: Yes), it means that it has been determined in the process of S1114 of the previous payout determination process that a small role winning has not been established. Based on the winning winning combination, it is confirmed whether or not a re-game winning is achieved (S1202).

  If the re-game winning is not established in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the process is terminated as it is, and if the re-game winning is established (S1202: Yes), the game state is reset. A re-game setting process for changing to a gaming state is executed (S1203), and a re-game command is set (S1204), and this process ends. Here, the replay command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp that the next game is a replay. In the start waiting process (S704) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  In the process of S1201, if the planned payout number is not 0 (S1201: No), a payout start command is set (S1205). Here, the payout start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the medal payout has started.

  In the process of S1206, it is confirmed whether or not the number of payouts counted by the number-of-payout counter matches the number of payouts stored in the payout number storage area (S1206). If they do not match (S1206: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50) (S1207).

  If the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit in the processing of S1207 (S1207: No), the credit counter count value is incremented by 1 (S1208), the number of payouts is incremented by 1 (S1209), and the credit display unit 35 And the display part change process which adds 1 each of the number of sheets of the acquired number display part 37 is performed (S1210), and it transfers to the process of S1206.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit in the processing of S1207 (S1207: Yes), the medal payout rotating plate is driven (S1209), and the medal is passed from the hopper device 91 through the medal discharge port 17. And pays out to the medal tray 18. Then, 1 is added to the number of payouts according to the medal detection signal of the payout detection sensor 91a attached to the hopper device 91 (S1210), and a display portion changing process is performed to add 1 to the number of acquired number display portion 37 (S1211). , The process proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206, when the number of payouts matches the planned payout number (S1206), a payout end command is set (S1212). Here, the payout end command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 so as to grasp that the medal payout has ended.

  In the process of S1213, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus game (S1213). If the current gaming state is a bonus game (S1213: Yes), the count value of a remaining acquisition number counter to be described later is used. A process of subtracting the number of payouts and subtracting the number of remaining acquisition number display part 36 is performed (S1214), and this process ends. Note that the process of subtracting the number of remaining acquisition number display part 36 may be performed in the display part changing process of S1211.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the bonus game process executed in S715 of the normal process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing bonus game processing executed by the MPU 151 of the main control device 131.

  First, prior to the description of the bonus game process, the bonus game will be described. The BB game is composed of a plurality of RB games. The RB game is composed of 12 JAC games. A JAC game is a game in which only one bet is allowed, and is a game that has a very high probability that a combination of JAC symbols is aligned on an active line, that is, a probability that a JAC winning will be established. That is, in the JAC game, in step S605 of the normal process described above, if the bet number is 1, an affirmative determination is made that the number is a specified number. When a JAC winning is established in the RB game, the maximum number (15 in this case) of medals is paid out. When the JAC winning is established 8 times, the RB game is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times.

  Also, the BB game ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 400). When the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number during the RB game, not only the BB game but also the RB game is ended. This is a contrivance for suppressing the player's euphoria by giving an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out during the BB game, and ensuring the soundness of the game. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols to be transferred to the RB game is not set, and the configuration is set to shift to the RB game immediately after the shift to the BB game and immediately after the RB game ends. Therefore, it can be said that the BB game is a game that continuously shifts to the RB game until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  When the bonus game process is executed, it is first confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a bonus game (S1301). If the bonus game is not being played (S1301: No), the bonus symbol determination process shown in S1302 to S1306 is executed.

  In this bonus symbol determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning flag is set (S1302), and when the BB winning flag is set (S1302: Yes), it is set in the process of S914 of the payout determining process. Based on the winning winning combination, it is confirmed whether or not a BB winning has been established (S1303).

  When the BB winning is established in the process of S1303 (S1303: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S1304). In the BB start process, the BB winning flag is reset and the BB setting flag is set in the BB information storage area 153b to obtain a BB game which is a kind of bonus game. In addition, 400 is set in the remaining acquisition number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and a process of displaying 400 on the remaining acquisition number display unit 36 is performed. Incidentally, whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus game is determined based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set.

  Subsequently, in the process of S1305, an RB start process is executed (S1305). In the RB start process, 8 is set in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is set in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games. Each counter such as a remaining acquisition number counter and a remaining JAC winning counter is provided in the BB information storage area 153b. After performing the RB start process, an RB command transmitted to the display control device 111 is set in order to grasp that the RB game is started (S1306).

  In the process of S1307, a status command is set (S1307). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 111 in order to grasp the current gaming state. That is, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the BB winning flag is not set, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game is set, and if it is determined in the process of S1303 that a BB winning is not established. Is set with a status command indicating that it is a BB carryover game, and when the RB command is set in the processing of S1306, a status command indicating that it is a BB game is set.

  In the process of S1308, a game number display process is performed (S1308), and this process ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining acquired number display unit 36, the acquired number display unit 37, or the like is performed.

  If the game state is a bonus game in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not a JAC prize has been established based on the winning combination set in the process of S914 of the payout determination process ( S1309). When the JAC winning is established in the processing of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC winning counter is decremented by 1 (S1310), and when the JAC winning is not achieved (S1309: No), one JAC game is played. Since it has been digested, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining JAC game counter without performing the processing of S1310 (S1311).

  Subsequently, in the processing of S1312, it is confirmed whether either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S1312). If any of the results in S1312, is 0, that is, if the JAC winning is established 8 times or the JAC game is digested 12 times (S1312: Yes), it means that the RB game end condition is established. Therefore, an RB end process for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S1313).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1314). If it is not 0 (S1314: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. Since this means that the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the above-described RB start process is executed (S1315), and the RB command is set (S1316). Thereafter, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S1307), a game number display process is executed (S1308), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0 in the processing of S1312, that is, when the JAC winning is not yet established 8 times and the JAC game is not consumed 12 times. (S1312: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1317). If the counter value is not 0 in the processing of S1317 (S1317: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the BB game end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S1307), a game number display process is executed (S1308), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the special game state end shown in S1318 to S1319 is completed. Execute the process. In the special game state end process, first, the above-described RB end process is executed (S1318), and then the BB end process for clearing the data in the BB information storage area 153b is executed (S1319). Further, in the above-described processing of S1314, even when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 (S1314: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the BB end processing of S1619 is executed. To do. After performing the BB termination process, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game is set (S1307), a game number display process is performed (S1308), and this process is terminated.

  Next, each control process executed by the display control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU processing is broadly divided into a display main process that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a control signal from the main controller 131. There is a command interrupt process that is activated based on the input. Here, for convenience of explanation, display timer interrupt processing and command interrupt processing will be described first, and then display main processing will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing display timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The display timer interrupt process is a process periodically executed by the display control device 111, and is executed, for example, every 1 msec based on the clock signal generated from the clock circuit 183.

  When the display timer interrupt process is executed, the next command interrupt is prohibited (S2001), and 1 is added to the interrupt timer counter 186b (S2002). Thereafter, the interrupt flag is read (S2003), and the interrupt flag is cleared (S2004). Then, the next command interruption is permitted (S2005), and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. As described above, the main control device 131 transmits various commands to the display control device 111 according to the current game state, the progress of the game, and the like. The display control device 111 immediately executes command interrupt processing based on the reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 131, more specifically, based on the signal input from the signal latch circuit 182.

  When the command interrupt process is executed, the next timer interrupt is prohibited (S2101), and it is confirmed whether or not the strobe signal is normal (S2102). The strobe signal is a signal transmitted from the main controller 131 together with the command, and the MPU 181 starts command interrupt processing based on the reception of the strobe signal.

  If the strobe signal is normal in the processing of S2102 (S2102: Yes), command data is acquired (S2103), and it is confirmed whether or not the acquired command data is normal (S2104). If the command data is normal in the process of S2104 (S2104: Yes), the command reception process is executed (S2105), the maximum number is set in the retry counter (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2109.

  If the acquired command data is not normal in the process of S2104 (S2104: No), the value of the retry counter is incremented by 1 (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2109. On the other hand, if the strobe signal is not normal in the process of S2102 (S2102: No), it is determined that there is some malfunction, the maximum number is set in the retry counter (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109.

  In the processing of S2109, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the retry counter is the maximum value (S2109). If the value of the retry counter is the maximum value (S2109: Yes), the command from the main control device 131 has been normally received. Alternatively, it means that there is some abnormality in the command from the main control device 131, and the command could not be received normally even though the command interruption processing for the allowable number of retries was performed. In such a case, the value of the retry counter is cleared (S2110), the interrupt flag is read (S2111), and the interrupt flag is cleared (S2112).

  If the retry counter value is not the maximum value in the processing of S2109 (S2109: No), or if the interrupt flag is cleared in the processing of S2112, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S2113), and this processing Exit.

  When a command is received from the main controller 131 during the display timer interrupt process, this command is latched by the signal latch circuit 182, and the command interrupt process is executed immediately after the display timer interrupt process is completed. Similarly, when the display timer interrupt processing timing comes during the command interrupt processing, the clock signal is latched by the latch circuit 184, and the display timer interrupt processing is executed immediately after the command interrupt processing ends. . That is, the slot machine 10 is configured such that multiple interrupts do not occur between the display timer interrupt process and the command interrupt process.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. When the command reception process is executed in step S2105 of the command interruption process, the display control apparatus 111 first stores the command received from the main control apparatus 131 in the reception command storage area 186a (S2201). In addition to the notification command confirmed in the process of S2202 and the door open / close command confirmed in the process of S2203, the command transmitted from the main controller 131 includes, for example, a variable effect (upper part) that changes when the game is executed. For example, a change command for instructing display of the lamp 13 and pronunciation of the speaker 14), a stand-by effect command for instructing a stand-by effect, and the like.

  When the processing of S2201 is completed, the command type received from the main controller 131 is determined, whether or not the received command is a notification command is confirmed (S2202), and if the received command is a notification command (S2202). : Yes), as described above, there is a possibility that the game has been executed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or with the front door 12 opened. The process proceeds to the error notification setting process.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a notification command in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), then it is confirmed whether the received command is a door opening / closing command (S2203), and the received command is a door opening / closing command. If it is not a command (S2203: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2208), and this process is terminated. The process of S2208 is a process of changing the output state of the upper lamp 13 and the speaker 14 based on the above-described change command and standby effect command.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a door opening / closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on (S2204), and the number of opening / closing operations of the front door 12 from the door opening / closing command is determined. Is acquired (S2205). As described above, the door opening / closing command is composed of 2 bytes, and information indicating the opening / closing counter is stored in the second byte, so the second byte information is acquired.

  In the process of S2206, it is confirmed whether or not the opening / closing count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 in the process of S2205 is the same as the value stored in the value of the opening / closing counter 186g of the display control apparatus 111. (S2206). That is, in the process of S2206, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 corresponds to the value stored in the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111. I have confirmed.

  In the process of S2206, when the open / close count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 is different from the value stored in the open / close counter 186g (S2206: No), the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 is set. Since the value does not correspond to the value of the open / close count counter 186g of the display control device 111, either the main control device 131 or the display control device 111 has been replaced. However, in this embodiment, since the display controller 111 compares the value of the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 with the value of the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, the main controller 131 is replaced. The possibility that it was done becomes high. Therefore, in order to notify that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced with an unauthorized one, an error notification setting process is executed (S2207), and this process ends.

  In the error notification setting process of S2207, the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 are used to set a display mode indicating that the main control device 131 may be replaced, or to the key cylinder 20 with the key. Is set in a display mode indicating that the game has been executed in a state in which the game is inserted and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened.

  Further, the notification started by the error notification setting process of S2207 is continuously notified for a predetermined time even when the reset switch 123 is operated and an error reset operation is performed. In the present embodiment, the notification is continuously performed for one minute, and even if the reset switch 123 is operated during that time, the operation is invalidated or ignored. Note that the resetting of the notification is canceled when the reset switch 123 is operated when one minute or more has passed since the start of the notification. Further, the time measurement for 1 minute from the start of error notification may be performed only while power is supplied. In this configuration, even if the power is turned off by an unauthorized person to cancel the error notification, when the power is supplied again, the notification is started within one minute.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the open / close count transmitted and acquired from the main controller 131 is the same as the value stored in the open / close counter 186g (S2206: No), the open / close counter of the main controller 131 is obtained. Since the value of 153e corresponds to the value of the opening / closing counter 186g of the display control device 111, this process is terminated without executing the error notification setting process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control apparatus 111. The display main process is executed when power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 122.

  When the display main process is executed, the stack pointer value is set in the MPU 181 as an initialization process, and an interrupt mode that permits command interrupt process and display timer interrupt process is set. Thereafter, register groups in the MPU 181 Various settings for the I / O device and the like are performed (S2301).

  When the initialization process of S2301 is completed, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in the present embodiment) (S2302). If it is in a voltage drop state (S2302: Yes), it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S2304).

  On the other hand, if the system state is not a voltage drop state in the process of S2302 (S2302: No), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b is 0 (S2304). If the value of the interrupt timer counter is not 0 (S2304: No), it means that the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b has been updated in the process of S2002 of the display timer interrupt process described above. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening / closing flag 186f is on (S2305). If the current door opening / closing flag 186e is off (S2305: No), then the door opening sensor 26 is activated. It is confirmed whether or not it is on (S2306).

  If the door opening sensor 26 is off in the processing of S2306 (S2306: No), the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is not rotated, and the front door 12 is not opened. A drive data output process for outputting drive data to drive the unit is executed (S2308). The drive data output process will be described later.

  If the current door open / close flag 186e is turned on in the process of S2305 or the door open sensor 26 is turned on in the process of S2306 (S2305: Yes or S2306: Yes), a key is inserted into the key cylinder 20. Since the game is executed with the rotation operation being performed or the front door 12 being opened, the error data setting process is executed (S2307), and then the drive data output process is executed (S2307). S2308). Note that the notification set by the error notification setting process of S2307 is also configured to invalidate or ignore the reset operation for a predetermined time.

  In the processing of S2305 to S2308, when the game is executed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated or when the front door 12 is opened, the drive is performed after executing the error notification setting processing. Since the data output process is executed, it is possible to notify the outside that the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and is rotated, or that the front door 12 is opened. As described above, when the fraudster knows that an error notification is to be made when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the front door 12 is not closed after the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one. It is conceivable that the game is started with the door opened, or the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to start the game without changing the output of the door detection sensor 24. However, the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20. If the game is executed while the front door 12 is opened or the front door 12 is opened, an error can be notified to the outside, so that the main controller 131 is replaced by an unauthorized person. It is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed. Therefore, even if the cheating person knows that the slot machine 10 notifies the replacement of the main control device 131 at the timing when the front door 12 is opened and closed, a bonus game is forcibly generated by the cheating person. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if the value of the interrupt timer counter 186b is 0 (S2304: Yes), or after the drive data output process is completed, whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 131 is described in more detail. Confirms whether or not a command has been received in the command interrupt process (S2309).

  If a command is received in the process of S2309 (S2309: Yes), a received command check process is performed (S2310). In the received command check process, a process such as determining an auxiliary effect to be performed based on each command stored in the received command storage area 186a in the previous command interruption process is performed. The process performed in the received command check process includes a stop symbol command process performed based on reception of a stop symbol command, a status command process performed based on reception of a status command, and a lottery result command performed based on reception of a lottery result command There are a process, a winning command process performed based on receiving a winning command, a winning line command process performed based on receiving a winning line command, a rotation information command process performed based on receiving a rotation information command, and the like.

  Specifically, for example, if the received command is a lottery result command meaning BB winning, whether or not to perform an auxiliary effect suggesting BB winning, and what kind of auxiliary effect is to be performed A process of determining a specific aspect of the auxiliary effect to be performed is performed, such as whether to perform the auxiliary effect or at which stop command generation timing the BB winning is suggested. In addition, when a rotation information command or a stop symbol command is received, it is determined whether or not the BB winning suggestion timing determined at the time of receiving the lottery result command. Set. That is, in the received command check process, the drive control content of the auxiliary effect section is determined based on the command data received from the main control device 131.

  On the other hand, when the command is not received in the processing of S2309 (S2309: No), or after the reception command check processing is completed, update processing of the random number value used when selecting the auxiliary effect is executed (S2311). ), The process returns to the process of S2302, and the processes of S2302 to S2311 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing drive data output processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The drive data output process is a process for outputting drive data to drive the auxiliary effect section. That is, in the slot machine 10, command data from the main control device 131 is acquired by the command interrupt process, an auxiliary effect is determined based on the command data acquired by the received command check process, and the drive data output process is performed. The auxiliary production unit is driven.

  When the drive data output process is executed, the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is reset (S2401), and the startup command check process is executed (S2402). As described above, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111 (S510). Therefore, if a power recovery command is not received within a predetermined time (within 2 seconds in the present embodiment) after the power is turned on, the drive control of the auxiliary effect section is executed in the startup command check process, and an error is generated. Inform.

  In the processing of S2403, device control processing is executed (S2403). Although details will be described later, when various commands are received from the main control device 131, an auxiliary effect to be performed by the auxiliary effect unit is determined based on the received command. In the device control process, a process of outputting the corresponding drive data to the auxiliary effect unit to perform the determined auxiliary effect is performed. By performing such a process, for example, an auxiliary effect such that the upper lamp 13 is lit in a predetermined color or a predetermined character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is performed.

  In the process of S2404, a system state change process is executed (S2404). The system state includes a voltage drop state, an initialization state, and a normal state, and the auxiliary display unit 15 is initialized according to the system state each time.

  In the process of S2405, a voltage drop check process is executed (S2405). In the voltage drop check process, the power failure signal supplied from the input / output port 187 is monitored, and the system state is changed from the normal state to the voltage drop state when the power failure signal is switched from the OFF state to the ON state.

  In the process of S2406, a specific time process is executed (S2406). The specific time process is a process periodically performed every predetermined specific time (10 msec in the present embodiment). For example, the output data buffer is updated by the LED data table for driving the upper lamp 13, and the speaker 14. This is a process for changing the volume of the musical sound output from.

  In the process of S2407, a drive data switching process is executed (S2407). The drive data switching process is a process for switching drive data according to the passage of time, gaming state, etc., except when receiving a command from the main controller 131. In the drive data switching processing, for example, processing such as switching of the color for lighting the upper lamp 13 and switching of the display scene displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is performed. That is, the drive data change process is a process for changing the auxiliary effect with time, unlike the above-described specific time process.

  In the processing of S2408, door opening / closing monitoring processing is executed (S2408). The door opening / closing monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the front door 12 has been opened / closed with respect to the housing 11 from the input state of the door detection sensor 24. Specifically, a process of determining as an error (abnormality) a case where a door opening / closing command is not received from the main control device 131 after a predetermined time (for example, 10 msec) has elapsed since it was determined that the front door 12 was opened / closed. It is. This door opening / closing monitoring process will be described later.

  In the process of S2409, the value of the interrupt timer counter is cleared (S2409), and then it is confirmed again whether the system state is a voltage drop state (S2410). If the system state is a voltage drop state in the process of S2410 (S2410: Yes), a power failure process is performed (S2411). If the system state is not a voltage drop state (S2410: No), this process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing specific time processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. The specific time process is executed when the process of S2406 of the drive data output process is executed.

  When the specific time process is executed, the value of the 10 msec timer counter is updated (S2501). Specifically, a process of adding the current interrupt timer counter value to the 10 msec timer counter value is performed.

  In the process of S2502, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the 10 msec timer counter is 10 or more (S2502). If it is smaller than 10 (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the 10 msec timer counter is 10 or more in the processing of S2502 (S2502: Yes), it means that the specific time has elapsed, so 10 is subtracted from the value of the 10 msec timer counter (S2503), and S2504 to S2508. After the drive data change process shown in the process is executed, this process ends.

  In the process of S2504, the LED data change process for setting the data from the LED data table to the output data buffer is executed (S2504), and then the auxiliary effect synchronization check for synchronizing the BGM and the LED effect in the bonus game. When the process is executed (S2505) and left unattended during BGM playback, a fade-out process for decreasing the volume of the BGM is executed 30 seconds later (S2506).

  Then, in the process of S2507, when left unattended, a demonstration start check process for starting a demonstration effect is executed 60 seconds later (S2507), and the volume knob value is checked to change the volume of the sound. The volume check process is executed (S2508), and this process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing door opening / closing monitoring processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 111. When the door opening / closing monitoring process is executed in S2408 of the drive data output process, a value input from the door detection sensor 24 is acquired (S2601), and the door detection sensor 24 is turned on based on the acquired value. It is confirmed whether or not (S2602). Note that whether the door detection sensor 24 is on or off is determined according to the acquired voltage value as described above.

  If the door detection sensor 24 is on in the process of S2602 (S2602: Yes), the current door open / close flag 186f that stores the open / closed state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S2603), and the door is detected. If the sensor 24 is in an off state (S2602: No), the current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned off (S2604), and the process proceeds to S2605.

  In the process of S2605, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening / closing flag 185e for storing the previous opening / closing state of the front door 12 is ON (S2605). If the previous door opening / closing flag 186e is OFF (S2605: No). ), The process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2606 to S2608. As described above, when the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF. Therefore, when the previous door open / close flag 186e is off, the door is already opened or closed, and the process directly proceeds to S2609.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening / closing flag 186e was turned on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is started, and then the current door opening / closing flag 186f is turned on. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S2606). As described above, when the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11, the door detection sensor 24 changes from OFF → ON → OFF, so if the current door open / close flag 186f is ON (S2606). : Yes), since the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is continued and the opening or closing is not completed, the process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2607 and S2608.

  On the other hand, if the current door opening / closing flag 186f is off in the processing of S2606 (S2606: No), the front door 12 has completed the opening / closing operation with respect to the housing 11, and is transmitted from the main controller 131. In order to set the timing for confirming the door opening / closing command, the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 10 (S2607), the value 1 is added to the opening / closing counter 186g (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609. .

  In the processing of S2609, the value of the current door opening / closing flag 186f is stored in the previous door opening / closing flag 186e (S2609), and then it is confirmed whether the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610). The command check timer 186c has the value 0 until the value 10 is set in the processing of S2607 described above, that is, in the initial state. Therefore, if the process of S2610 is in an initial state (S2610: No), the process is terminated without executing the processes of S2611 to S2615.

  On the other hand, if the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 in the processing of S2610 (S2610: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the command check timer 186c (S2611), and the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 0. It is confirmed whether or not (S2612).

  If the value of the command check timer 186c is not 0 in the process of S2612 (S2612: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2612: Yes), the front door 12 When a predetermined time elapses after the door is opened and closed, it is time to determine whether or not a door open / close command from the main controller 131 has been received. Therefore, the door open / close command reception flag 186d is turned on upon receipt of the door open / close command. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S2613).

  By setting 10 as the value of the command check timer 186c, it is possible to provide a waiting time until a door open / close command is received from the main control device 131. Therefore, the doors in the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are provided. A shift in the confirmation timing of the detection sensor 24 can be taken into consideration. Therefore, it can be accurately determined whether or not the front door 12 has been opened and closed with respect to the housing 11. The door opening / closing command is determined at a timing 10 m after the door opening / closing monitoring process (drive data output process) is executed every 1 msec and the display control device 111 detects the opening of the front door 12.

  If the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2613 (S2613: Yes), the door opening / closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. In order to monitor the opening, the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is turned off (S2614). If the door opening / closing command reception flag 186d is off (S2613: No), the door opening / closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. If not, an error notification setting process is performed (S2615), and this process ends.

  Note that the error notification setting process of S2615 is a process of setting the outputs of the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and a display mode for notifying the outside that the main control device 131 may be replaced. And audio output is set. In addition, the notification set by the error notification setting process of S2615 is also configured to invalidate or ignore the reset operation for a predetermined time.

  Therefore, since the door opening / closing command cannot be received unless the main control device 131 is replaced with a proper one, it is possible to notify each time the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced. It is possible to reliably notify the outside that there is. Of course, if the power is turned off to cancel the error notification, the game cannot be executed.

  As described above, the door detection sensor 24 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, and the front door 12 is opened / closed with respect to the housing 11 (opening operation or closing operation). Then, a door opening / closing command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111. The display control device 111 confirms that the front door 12 has been opened / closed, and after a predetermined time (10 msec), It is confirmed whether or not a door opening / closing command has been received from the control device 131, and if the door opening / closing command has not been received after a predetermined time, it is notified to the outside that the main control device 131 may have been replaced. ing. When the hall official recognizes the notification, it confirms whether or not the main control device 131 has been replaced. If the main control device 131 is an unauthorized main control device, replace it with a regular main control device or use the slot machine. Since the ten games can be stopped, it is possible to prevent a bonus game (BB game) from being illegally generated by an unauthorized main control device and paying out medals.

  Here, when the slot machine 10 is installed in a hall, a plurality of the slot machines 10 are arranged on the island, so that the power supply outlet exposed to the outside from the slot machine 10 is provided inside the island. It is inserted into the outlet. Therefore, the supply and stop of the power to the slot machine 10 are performed collectively on the entire island or by operating the power switch 122 provided inside the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a fraudster opens the front door 12 with a tool such as a bar, or inserts a lock key into the key cylinder 20 to open the front door 12 and replaces the main controller 131 with an unauthorized one, In order for the fraudster to play a game, the front door 12 must be closed with power supplied. Therefore, in order to play a game, the front door 12 must be closed while power is supplied. Therefore, a door open / close command is always transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111, and the display control device 111. Thus, it is possible to reliably notify that the main control device 131 may be replaced with an unauthorized one. Furthermore, the fraudster knows that the main control device 131 may have been replaced with an unauthorized one when the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the game is started with the front door 12 open. In this case, or when the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and being rotated, the execution of the game is prohibited and an error is notified. Is never done. Therefore, when the main controller 131 is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, it is possible to reliably notify the error and prevent the unauthorized main controller 131 from starting a game. be able to.

  The number of times the front door 12 is opened is stored by the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, and is stored in the open / close counter 153e and the open / close counter 186g. If the number of times does not correspond, a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, when the main controller 131 is replaced, not only notification based on the door opening / closing command but also notification based on the number of times the front door 12 is opened can be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the hall personnel and the like more surely recognize that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced.

  Further, when trying to know the values stored in the open / close counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the open / close counter 186g of the display controller 111, it takes time to analyze the open / close counter 153e. Since the fraudster exchanges the main control device 131 at an early stage because it is not known to the hall-related persons or the like, if the fraudulent person knows the existence of the open / close counter 153e, the open / close count Since it takes time to analyze the counter 153e, the act of replacing the main controller 131 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of illegally exchanging the main control device 131.

  The main control device 131 is included in the substrate box and attached to the housing 11, and the display control device 111 is included in the substrate box and attached to the front door 12. Therefore, since it takes time to replace the two board boxes of the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, it is possible to suppress the act of being replaced with an unauthorized main control device and display control device itself. it can. Further, the main control device 131 is attached to the housing 11, the display control device 111 is attached to the front door 12, and the two substrate boxes are separated from each other, so that it takes time for the replacement work. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action itself that is exchanged for an unauthorized main control device and display control device.

  Further, since the outer shape of the main control device 131 is covered with the casing 11 and the front door 12, the front door is always used when an unauthorized person replaces the main control device 131 with an unauthorized main control device. 12 must be opened. Further, when the front door 12 is opened and closed, the metal fitting 22 is always moved. The movement of the metal fitting 22 is detected by the door detection sensor 24 and replaced with an unauthorized main controller. It is determined whether or not. Therefore, according to the configuration of the slot machine 10, it is possible to detect that it has been replaced with an unauthorized main control device, and to reliably notify it.

  In the first embodiment, when the game is started, it is checked whether the door opening sensor 26 or the door detection sensor 24 is on, and at least one of the door opening sensor 26 or the door detection sensor 24 is on. If it is, it is determined that the game is started with the front door 12 opened, or that the game is started with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 (S709: Yes or S710: Yes or S2305: Yes or S2306). : Yes), the error notification is set without executing the main control of the game, but the door opening sensor 26 is on without checking whether the door detection sensor 24 is on. It may be configured to check whether or not.

  Next, the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32 and FIG. In the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the housing 11 and it is determined whether or not the main controller 131 has been replaced during the opening operation and the closing operation of the front door 12. Instead, in the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, the door detection sensor 24 is attached to the front door 12 and it is determined whether or not the main controller 131 has been replaced during the closing operation of the front door 12. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment performs the same processing as the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16 and FIGS. 18 to 29 of the first embodiment. In the following explanation, “current door open / close flag” is “current door open flag”, “previous door open / close flag” is “previous door open flag”, and “door open / close command reception flag” is “door close flag received”. “Flag” and “door open / close command” are read as “door close command”, and “open / close counter” is read as “open counter”.

  FIG. 30 is a view schematically showing a part of the structure for locking the front door 12 of the second embodiment with respect to the housing 11. Although not shown, a cover that covers the door detection sensor 1024 is attached to the door detection sensor 1024 of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in 2nd Embodiment, the door detection sensor 1024 is attached to the bracket 1024a connected with the locking device of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the door detection sensor 1024 is opened and closed in conjunction with the opening and closing operation of the front door 12.

  In addition, when the front door 12 is opened when the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 of the second embodiment moves in conjunction with the rotation operation of the key cylinder 20 ( It is configured to be held in the posture shown in FIG. When the key cylinder 20 is rotated and the interlocking rod 21 moves upward, the hook 22 is held by holding the interlocking rod 21 moved upward by a holding mechanism (not shown). In addition, the holding mechanism (not shown) is configured to release the holding of the interlocking rod 21 by contacting a part of the housing 11 when the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, while the front door 12 is opened, the saddle fitting 22 is held in the posture shown in FIG. 30B, so that the output of turning on the door detection sensor 1024 is continued. A change in the output state of the door detection sensor 1024 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33B is a graph showing the relationship between the change in the output of the door detection sensor 1024 and the time when the state of the front door 12 changes. Before the time t1 shown in FIG. 33 (b), the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. Therefore, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is off. When the key is inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated to open the front door 12, the metal fitting 22 moves and blocks the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024 (time t 1). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is on at time t1.

  And even if the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing | casing 11, since the metal fitting 22 is hold | maintained by the holding mechanism mentioned above in the position which shields the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024, the front door 12 is closed. The ON state is continued until time t4.

  Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 and the front door 12 is pushed to a position where the tip 22a of the saddle fitting 22 passes through the support fitting 23, the holding of the saddle fitting 22 is released. The metal fitting 22 moves upward and the shielding of the optical path of the door detection sensor 1024 is released (time t4). As a result, the output of the door detection sensor 1024 is turned off at time t4.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 32 schematically shows the electrical configuration of the display control device 111 of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the RAM 153 of the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, the opening / closing counter 153e and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f and the current door opening / closing flag 153g are replaced with the opening / closing counter 153e and the current door opening / closing flag 153g. A previous door opening flag 153f and a current door opening flag 153g are provided.

  The opening number counter 153e is a counter for storing the number of times the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the casing 11, and is added when the front door 12 is closed after being opened (the process of S407 in FIG. 12). Is done. It should be noted that the number of times stored in the opening number counter 153e is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the process of S407 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  The previous and current door opening flags 153f and 153g are flags that indicate whether or not the front door 12 is open (opening) with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening / closing flag 153f is the front door 12 or not. The previous door open / close flag 153g indicates the current open state of the front door 12. The current door opening flag 153g is turned on or off in the processing of S403 and S404 of the door opening / closing command setting processing (see FIG. 12), and the previous door opening flag 153f is the processing of S410 of the door opening / closing command setting processing this time. The value of the door opening flag 153g is stored as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the RAM 186 of the display control device 111 of the second embodiment has a door opening / closing command reception flag 186d, a previous door opening / closing flag 186e, a current door opening / closing flag 186f, and an opening / closing counter. Instead of 186g, a door closing command reception flag 186d, a previous door opening flag 186e, a current door opening flag 186f, and an opening counter 186g are provided.

  The door closing command reception flag 186d is a flag indicating whether or not a door closing command has been received from the main controller 131. When the door closing command is received in the command receiving process (see FIG. 25), the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the process of S2204. In step S2614 of the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), the process is turned off.

  The previous and current door opening flags 186e and 186f are flags that indicate whether or not the front door 12 is in an open state (opening) with respect to the housing 11, and the previous door opening flag 186e is a front door. 12 indicates the previous open state, and the current door open flag 186f indicates the current open state of the front door 12. The current door opening flag 186f is turned on or off in the processing of S2603 and S2604 in the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29), and the previous door opening flag 186e is opened in the current door opening / closing monitoring process in S2609. The value of the middle flag 186f is stored as it is.

  The opening number counter 186g is a counter that stores the number of times the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the housing 11, and when the front door 12 is closed after being opened (the processing of S2608 in FIG. 29), 1 is added. Is done. The number of times stored in the open / close counter 186g is configured such that the initial value is 0 and the maximum value is 255, and the value becomes 0 when the processing of S2608 is executed in the state of the maximum value 255. Yes.

  Here, the door open / close command setting process (see FIG. 12), normal process (see FIG. 15), command reception process (see FIG. 25), display main process (see FIG. 26), door open / close executed in the second embodiment. The monitoring process (see FIG. 29) will be briefly described.

  In the door opening / closing command setting process executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on based on the value acquired in the process of S401 (S402), and the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on. If it is in the open state (S402: Yes), the current door open flag 135g that stores the open state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S403), and if the door detection sensor 1024 is in the off state. (S402: No), this time the door opening flag 135g is turned off (S404).

  In the process of S405, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening flag 135f that stores the previous opening state of the front door 12 is ON (S405). If the previous door opening flag 135f is OFF, (S405: No), since the front door 12 is closed, the process proceeds to S410. If the previous door open flag 135f is on (S405: Yes), the front door 12 is open. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 135g is turned on (S406).

  If the current door open flag 135g is turned on in the process of S406 (S406: Yes), the front door 12 is still in an open state, so the process proceeds to S410 and the current door open flag 135g is set. If it is off (S406: No), the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, so 1 is added to the value of the opening number counter 135e (S407), and the value of the opening number counter 135e. A door closing command (a signal including a door closing signal and a closing frequency signal) based on the above is created (S408).

  Then, the door closing command created in the processing of S408 is stored in a predetermined area of the transmission command storage area 135h (S409), and when the door opening / closing command setting processing is executed next, the open state of the front door 12 is confirmed. In order to do this, the value of the current door opening flag 135g is stored in the previous door opening flag 135f (S410), and this process ends.

  Further, in the normal processing executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 153g is on in the processing of S709, and whether or not the door opening sensor 26 is on in the processing of S710. If at least one is on (S709: Yes or S710: Yes), the game is played with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or the front door 12 is opened. Since it is started, an error notification setting process is executed (S711). On the other hand, if the current door opening flag 153g is off and the door opening sensor 26 is off (S709: No, S710: No), the processing after S712 is executed.

  Next, when command reception processing is executed in the second embodiment, the display control device 111 stores the command transmitted from the main control device 131 in the reception command storage area 186a, and the received command in the processing of S2203. Is a door closing command. If the received command is not a door closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2203), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a door closing command in the process of S2203 (S2203: Yes), the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on (S2204), and the front door 12 is closed after the door closing command is opened. The obtained number of times of release is acquired (S2205), and it is confirmed whether or not the acquired number of times of release is the same as the value stored in the value of the number of times of release counter 186g of the display control device 111 (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when the number of releases acquired from the main controller 131 is different from the value stored in the number-of-opens counter 186g (S2206: No), there is a possibility that one of the controllers has been replaced. Therefore, error notification setting processing is executed (S2207), and when the number of releases acquired from the main control device 131 is the same as the value stored in the number-of-releases counter 186g (S2206: No), error notification setting processing is performed. This process is terminated without executing.

  In the display main process executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the current door opening flag 186f is turned on in the process of S2305, and whether or not the door open sensor 26 is turned on in the process of S2306. If at least one of them is on (S2305: Yes or S2306: Yes), the game is performed with the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 and rotated, or with the front door 12 opened. Therefore, the error notification setting process is executed (S2307), and if the current door opening flag 186f is off and the door opening sensor 26 is off (S2305: No, S2306: No) Without executing the error notification setting process, the process proceeds to the drive data output process of S2308.

  Next, when the door opening / closing monitoring process is executed in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the door detection sensor 1024 is turned on based on the value acquired in the process of S2601 (S2602), and the door detection sensor 1024 is checked. Is on (S2602: Yes), the current door open flag 186f that stores the open state of the front door 12 for this time is turned on (S2603), and the door detection sensor 1024 is turned off. If so (S2602: No), the current door opening flag 186f is turned off (S2604), and the process proceeds to S2605.

  In the process of S2605, it is confirmed whether or not the previous door opening flag 185e that stores the previous opened state of the front door 12 is ON (S2605), and if the previous door opening flag 186e is OFF (S2605). : No), since the front door 12 is closed, the process proceeds to S2609 without executing the processes in S2606 to S2608.

  On the other hand, if the previous door opening flag 186e is turned on in the processing of S2605 (S2605: Yes), the front door 12 is being opened. Next, whether or not the current door opening flag 186f is turned on. (S2606) If the current door open flag 186f is on (S2606: Yes), the front door 12 is still open, so the process proceeds to S2609, and the current door open flag 186f is set. If it is off (S2606: No), it means that the front door 12 has been closed with respect to the housing 11, so that the value of the command check timer 186c is set to 10 (S2607) and the value of the open counter 186g is set. 1 is added (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609.

  In the processing of S2609, the value of the current door opening flag 186f is stored in the previous door opening flag 186e (S2609), and then it is confirmed whether the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610). If the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2610: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is greater than 0 (S2610: Yes), the command check timer 186c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2611), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the command check timer 186c has become 0 (S2612).

  If the value of the command check timer 186c is not 0 in the process of S2612 (S2612: No), this process is terminated, and if the value of the command check timer 186c is 0 (S2612: Yes), the front door 12 When a predetermined time elapses after the door is closed, it is time to determine whether or not the door closing command from the main control device 131 has been received, so it is confirmed whether or not the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on. (S2613).

  If the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned on in the processing of S2613 (S2613: Yes), the door closing command is normally received from the main controller 131, so the next front door 12 In order to monitor the opening, the door closing command reception flag 186d is turned off (S2614), and if the door closing command reception flag 186d is off (S2613: No), the door closing command is normally received from the main controller 131. If not, an error notification setting process is performed (S2615), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the door detection sensor 1024 is connected to both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111, and the front door 12 is opened and closed with respect to the housing 11. When a series of operations are executed, a door closing command is transmitted from the main control device 131 to the display control device 111, and the display control device 111 confirms that the front door 12 is closed after being opened. After a predetermined time (10 msec), it is confirmed whether or not a door closing command has been received from the main controller 131. If the door closing command has not been received after the predetermined time, the main controller 131 may have been replaced. It is informing the outside that there is. Therefore, even if the main controller 131 is replaced with an unauthorized one, a notification is given when the power is turned on and the front door 12 is closed to play a game by an unauthorized person. It can be externally recognized that there has been a possibility of being exchanged. When the hall official recognizes the notification, it confirms whether or not the main control device 131 has been replaced. If the main control device 131 is an unauthorized main control device, replace it with a regular main control device or use the slot machine. Since the ten games can be stopped, it is possible to prevent a bonus game (BB game) from being illegally generated by an unauthorized main control device and paying out medals.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the front door 12 is opened, the saddle fitting 22 is held at the moved position, and the ON detection is continued from the door detection sensor 1024. Thus, the state in which the front door 12 is open and the state in which the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 can be accurately distinguished and detected.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times the front door 12 is opened and closed is stored in the number-of-opens counter 153e of the main controller 131 and the number of opens counter 186g of the display controller 111. As in the first embodiment, hall personnel and the like can be made to recognize that there is a possibility that the main control device 131 has been replaced, and the main control device 131 is illegally replaced. The occurrence of itself can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the metal fitting 22 is held at the moved position, so that the door opening sensor 26 may not be provided. On the contrary, the door detection sensor 26 may be used to detect the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 without providing the door detection sensor 1024 in the movement range of the metal fitting 22. With this configuration, the holding mechanism for holding the metal fitting 22 (interlocking rod 21) in a moved state is not necessary, and the same operation and effect as in the second embodiment can be achieved with a simple structure.

  Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a view showing a connecting portion between the front door 12 and the housing 11. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the first hinge member 3001 and the second hinge member 3002, and FIGS. 34B and 35C show that the support shaft 3011 of the first hinge member 3001 is the second hinge. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a positional relationship in a state of being inserted into an insertion hole 3021 of a member 3002. Note that in FIGS. 34 (b) and 35 (c), the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are shown with hatching to emphasize them.

  In the modification of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 34, instead of the door detection sensor 1024 for detecting the state in which the front door 12 is opened, electrodes 3012 and 3022 for detecting the state in which the front door 12 is opened are provided. Is provided. Further, the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are fixed to hinges (first hinge member 3001 and second hinge member 3002) that serve as a support shaft when the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, in the modification of the second embodiment, the surface of the support shaft 3011 of the first hinge member 3001 attached to the housing 11 (support shaft 25a in the first and second embodiments). An electrode 3012 is fixed to the substrate. This electrode 3012 passes through the inside of the first hinge member 3001 and is connected to the cable 3013. On the other hand, an electrode 3022 is fixed to the inner surface of the insertion hole 3021 of the second hinge member 3002 attached to the front door 12. The electrode 3022 passes through the inside of the second hinge member 3002 and is connected to the cable 3023.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows the positional relationship in a state where the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11. As shown in the drawing, when the front door 12 is closed by the housing 11, the electrode 3012 of the first hinge member 3001 and the electrode 3022 of the second hinge member 3002 are not in contact with each other. Therefore, the cable 3013 and the cable 3023 are also disconnected, and the input indicating that the front door 12 is being opened to the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 (corresponding to the input of the door detection sensor) is also turned off.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11 in a state where it is rotated in the direction of the arrow from the state of FIG. In this state, the electrode 3012 of the first hinge member 3001 and the electrode 3022 of the second hinge member 3002 are in contact, and an input indicating that the front door 12 is being opened to the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 is on. It becomes.

  Therefore, the electrodes 3012 and 3022 are provided in the portion that always rotates in conjunction with the opening operation of the front door 12, and the opening / closing operation of the front door 12 is detected from the contact state of the electrodes 3012 and 3022. It is possible to accurately determine whether or not the door 12 is open. Further, as shown in the figure, the electrode 3022 is an inner surface of the insertion hole 3021 and is fixed to almost the entire periphery except the portion where the electrode 3012 is located when the front door 12 is closed. The opening of the front door 12 can be detected only by slightly opening 12 with respect to the housing 11.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on each embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are disposed inside the substantially box-shaped housing 11 and the front door 12, but the front door 12 opens forward. If it is the structure to be performed, it does not need to be sealed. For example, the present invention may be applied to a structure in which a front door opens and closes with respect to a frame body having four sides (that is, a conventional pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated).

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game has been started with the front door 12 being opened, based on the main control device 131 (the processing of S709 and S710 in FIG. 15) and the display control device 111 (see FIG. 26). (S2305 and S2306). However, it is also possible to make a determination in either one of them.

  In the above embodiment, when the door opening / closing command (or door closing command) is not received from the main control device 131, and the opening / closing number (or opening number) counter 153 e of the main control device 131 and the number of opening / closing operations of the display control device 111. (Or the number of times of opening) When the value with the counter 186g does not correspond, when the game is started with the front door 12 being opened, only the display control device 111 is notified, The board 171 and the display control device 111 may be connected, and a signal indicating the occurrence of an error may be output to an external apparatus (for example, a management computer) via the external concentrated terminal board 171. Furthermore, the output of the door detection sensor 24 and the door opening / closing command transmitted from the main controller 131 may be directly transmitted to the external device, and the door opening / closing monitoring process (see FIG. 29) may be executed in the external device. .

  Moreover, although the display control apparatus 111 shall be attached to the front door 12, it is good also as a structure attached to places where visual recognition is added, such as the back of the hopper apparatus 91, for example. Further, a control device connected to the door detection sensors 24, 1024, 2024 and the main control device 131 may be provided separately from the display control device 111. In this configuration, a command receiving process (see FIG. 25) and a door open / close monitoring process (see FIG. 29) are executed in a separate control device. Therefore, even when the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 are exchanged, it is possible to notify the outside that the main control device has been exchanged illegally.

  In the above embodiment, both the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 store the open / close count of the front door 12 in the open / close count counters 153e and 186g, but the values stored in the open / close count counters 153e and 186g. And a table for storing and associating arbitrary values with each other, and when transmitting a door open / close command from the main control device 131, the display control device transmits an arbitrary value corresponding to the value of the open / close counter 153e. In 111, it may be configured to determine whether an arbitrary value corresponding to the value of the opening / closing number counter 186g and the value received from the main control device 131 are the same (corresponding). With this configuration, the value corresponding to the number of times the front door 12 is opened and closed compared between the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 becomes irregular (for example, 111, 3, not the order of 1 to 255). Therefore, the value compared between the main control device 131 and the display control device 111 can be made difficult to be known by an unauthorized person.

  Moreover, although the door detection sensor 26 of the said embodiment shall be attached to the housing | casing 11, it is good also as what is attached to the front door 12. FIG. Furthermore, if it is possible to continuously detect at least one of the front door 12 being opened and closed, the type of the sensor may be a photo sensor or a proximity sensor, Any other type of sensor may be used.

  In the above embodiment, when the game state is a normal game, it is determined whether or not a start command is generated after three medals are bet. However, after one bet or two bets It goes without saying that it may be configured to determine whether or not a start command has been issued even after being issued. However, in the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to store a lottery table corresponding to the betting situation in advance.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having seven effective lines.

  In the above embodiment, the so-called A type slot machine has been described. However, the B type, the C type, the combined type of the A type and the C type, the combined type of the B type and the C type, and the type including the CT game. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, and it is clear that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained in any case. In addition, examples of bonus winning in each type include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, CT winning and the like.

  Further, the symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, and the like, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as identification information (identification information).

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 in which the number of valid lines set in accordance with the number of medals bet has been described, but a certain number (for example, five) of valid lines regardless of the number of medals bet. You may apply to the slot machine which sets. Even when the present invention is applied to such a slot machine, it is clear that the same operational effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been described. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  It is also possible to apply the present invention to a pachinko machine. In the case of a pachinko machine, the gaming machine main body is mounted on the outer frame, and a door member is provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body. The gaming machine main body is provided with a gaming board in which a gaming area as a gaming ball flying area is formed and an operating port and a liquid crystal display device are installed, and the gaming area and liquid crystal are provided by a visual window provided on the door member. The display device is visible. Then, as the game ball launched by the game ball launching device wins the operating opening, an internal lottery is performed and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the liquid crystal display device. Even when the configuration of the main control device and the display control device of the above-described embodiment is applied to such a pachinko machine, it is apparent that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Some pachinko machines output a 2-byte control signal in one command output process. In such a case, the time interval from the output of the first byte command to the output of the second byte command is very short, but the command received in the command interrupt processing as in the above embodiment is If only the reading process is performed and only the process of updating the value of the interrupt timer counter in the display timer interrupt process is performed, the total time required for these interrupt processes may be shorter than the output interval of the command. It is possible to expect the same effect as the above embodiment.

  The gaming machine and modified examples of the present invention are shown below.

  A frame body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the frame body, a main control means that is provided in a space formed by the door body and the frame body and that performs main control of the game, and is provided in the space Sub-control means for performing control in accordance with instructions from the main control means, and connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and for opening and closing the door body with respect to the frame body Detecting means for detecting, and the main control means determines whether or not the door body has been opened and closed with respect to the frame body based on the detection result of the detecting means, and the main judging means Transmitting means for transmitting a door opening / closing signal based on the opening / closing operation of the door body to the sub control means when it is determined that the door body has been opened / closed by the sub control means, , Based on the detection result of the detection means, Sub-determination means for determining whether or not the door body has been opened and closed, and transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means in a state in which it is determined by the sub-determination means that the door body has been opened and closed. A gaming machine 1 comprising first output means for outputting a message to the outside when the door opening / closing signal cannot be received.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the detection means for detecting the opening / closing operation of the door relative to the frame is connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and the main control means determines the frame body based on the detection result by the detection means. Whether the door body is opened or closed is determined by the main determination means. When it is determined by the main judging means that the door body is opened / closed, a door opening / closing signal based on the door body being opened / closed is transmitted to the sub-control means by the transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub-control means, the sub-determination means determines whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame based on the detection result of the detection means, and the door body is opened / closed by the sub-determination means. If the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means cannot be received in the state determined as described above, the fact is output to the outside by the first output means.

  Therefore, it is determined by the main judgment means of the main control means and the sub judgment means of the sub control means whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body. In the sub control means, the door body is opened and closed by the sub judgment means. When the door opening / closing signal cannot be received from the main control means in the state determined to have been operated, the first output means can output that the door body has been opened / closed.

  Therefore, when the main control means is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the door opening / closing signal is not transmitted from the main control means, so the door body is opened or closed by the unauthorized person, and the sub-judging means When it is determined that the door body has been opened and closed, the first output means can output that the main control means may have been replaced.

  Further, since an outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the first output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced. It is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  The opening / closing operation of the door body detected by the detecting means includes an opening operation for opening the door body with respect to the frame body, a closing operation for closing the door body with respect to the frame body, and the opening operation. It includes at least one of a series of operations in which a closing operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine 1, the sub-control unit includes a time-counting unit that counts a time after the sub-determination unit determines that the door body has been opened and closed, and the first output unit is predetermined by the time-measurement unit. A gaming machine 2 that outputs an output when the door opening / closing signal cannot be received before the time is counted.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the time from when it is determined that the door body has been opened / closed by the sub-determination means is counted by the timing means, and the door opening / closing signal is received until the predetermined time is counted by the timing means. If not, the output is performed by the first output means. Therefore, it is accurately determined whether or not the door body has been opened and closed in consideration of the difference between the timing at which the main judgment means of the main control means is executed and the timing at which the sub judgment means of the sub control means is executed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the main control means and the sub control means each include change information storage means for storing change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. Comparison means for comparing change information stored in the change information storage means of the control means with change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means, and a comparison result by the comparison means is the main control A second output means for outputting the change information stored in the change information storage means of the means to the outside when the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means does not correspond; A gaming machine 3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the main control means and the sub-control means each include change information storage means for storing change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. The change information stored in the change information storage means is compared with the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means by the comparison means. If the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means, the fact is indicated to the second output means. Is output by. Therefore, when the main control means is exchanged for an unauthorized person by the fraudulent person, the change information stored in the respective change information storage means does not correspond, so that the output by the second output means can be performed.

  Moreover, since the outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the second output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced, It can be suppressed that the special gaming state is forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.

  Further, since the change information stored in the change information storage means cannot be known without examining the contents of the change information storage means, it is often necessary to know the change information stored in the change information storage means. It will take a long time. Therefore, since it takes a lot of time to prevent the output of the second output means from being performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means with an unauthorized one.

  In the gaming machine 3, the comparison means and the second output means may be included in the main control means, or may be included in the sub control means. Further, a control means different from the main control means or the sub control means may have the comparison means and the second output means.

  The change information that changes as the door body closes is, for example, the number of times the door body is closed, or a value that changes irregularly as the door body closes (for example, 111 The next value is a value whose numerical value changes in the order of 3 and the next value is 255 or a random value).

  In the gaming machine 3, the change information stored in the change information storage means is the number of times the door body has been opened and closed, and the transmission means is stored in the change information storage means of the main control means together with the door open / close signal. The number of times of opening and closing is transmitted according to the stored number of times, and the comparison means is provided in the sub-control means, the number of times stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means, and the transmission means The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that it compares the number of times according to the transmitted opening / closing number signal.

  According to the gaming machine 4, an opening / closing frequency signal corresponding to the number of times the door body is opened and closed stored in the change information storage unit of the main control unit is transmitted together with the door opening / closing signal by the transmission unit, and is provided in the sub-control unit. The comparison unit compares the number of times stored in the change information storage unit of the sub-control unit with the number of times according to the open / close frequency signal transmitted by the transmission unit. Therefore, the door open / close signal and the open / close frequency signal are transmitted to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means can determine and notify the number of times the door body has been opened / closed. It is possible to reliably determine and notify that the battery has been replaced.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the sub control means stores the opening information of the door body when the sub judgment means determines that the door body has been opened, while the door body is closed. A game is executed when the sub-opening information storage means stores the closing information of the door body when the auxiliary determination means determines that it has been operated, and when the opening information is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means And a third output means for outputting the fact to the outside when the game machine 5 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the door opening information when the sub-determination means determines that the door has been opened, and the door closing when the sub-determination means determines that the door has been closed. When the game is executed when the information is stored in the sub opening / closing information storage means and the opening information is stored in the sub opening / closing information storage means, the fact is output to the outside by the third output means.

  Here, for example, if the fraudster knows that it is a gaming machine that outputs to the outside that the main control means has been exchanged at the timing of opening and closing the door body, An action is considered in which a game is executed without closing the door body and a special game state is forcibly generated.

  However, when the door body is opened and not closed, the opening information is stored in the auxiliary opening / closing information storage means, so that the door remains open even if a game is executed by an unauthorized person. The fact that the game is being executed can be output by the third output means. Therefore, it is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed that there is a possibility that the main control means has been replaced by an unauthorized person.

  Note that the opening or closing operation determined by the sub-determination means is determined when the detection means detects that the door body has actually opened or closed, for example, the detection result by the detection means, When the state changes from off to on to off, or from on to off to on, it may be determined that the operation has been opened or closed.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the main control means includes a lottery means for performing a lottery in a special gaming state that gives an advantageous game value to a player when a game is executed, and the door body. When the main determining means determines that the door has been opened, the door opening information is stored, whereas when the main determining means determines that the door has been closed, the door closing information is stored. And a main opening / closing information storage unit for storing the opening / closing information, and when the release information is stored in the main opening / closing information storage unit, the lottery by the lottery unit is prohibited or ignored.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in the main control means, when a game is executed, the lottery means performs a lottery in a special gaming state that gives an advantageous game value to the player. Further, the main opening / closing information when the main determining means determines that the door has been opened and the closing information of the door when the main determining means determines that the door has been closed are the main opening / closing information. When the information is stored in the information storage means and the opening / closing information is stored in the main opening / closing information storage means, the lottery by the lottery means is prohibited or ignored.

  Here, for example, when a game is executed with the door opened, there is a possibility that some illegal act has been performed in the gaming machine. However, when the door is opened and not closed, the lottery in the special gaming state is prohibited or ignored, so that it is prevented that game value is given to gaming machines that may have been cheated. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the frame body is provided with a first locking member that locks the door body, and the door body is closed with respect to the frame body in the state where the first body is closed. A front end located inside the frame body from one locking member; a rear end portion positioned closer to the door body than the first locking member in a state of being closed with respect to the frame body; a rear end portion and the front end portion And a groove portion that is inscribed by the first locking member. The groove portion and the first locking member are urged to be locked with the groove portion and the first locking member. A second locking member configured to be movable from a state where the second locking member is locked, and the detection means is at a position different from a position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member. The gaming machine 7 is provided within a range in which the second locking member moves.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the first locking member provided on the frame body and the second locking member provided on the door body are locked, and the door body is closed with respect to the frame body. The second locking member is closed to the frame body and has a distal end located on the inner side of the frame body than the first locking member, and the door from the first locking member in a state closed to the frame body. It has a rear end portion located on the body side and a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and inscribed by the first locking member, and biased to a state of locking with the first locking member Has been. That is, when the door body is opened, the first locking member and the second locking member cannot be released unless the second locking member is moved. In addition, since the detection means is provided in a position different from the position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member and within the range in which the second locking member moves, the detection means It can be detected that the second locking member has started to move. Therefore, since the detection means detects that the second locking member that operates without fail when the door body is opened, it can be reliably detected that the door body is opened.

  Also, when the door body is closed from the opened state, the second locking member is detected by the detecting means, and then the first locking member and the second locking member are locked. Therefore, even if the supply of power is cut off and the main control means is illegally replaced, when the power is supplied and the door is closed to play a game, the output is made by the first or second output means. . Accordingly, it is possible to reliably output that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one, and to recognize the possibility that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one by the output.

  In the gaming machine 7, the main judgment means and the sub judgment means are configured such that the second locking member moves and the detection means detects the start of the opening operation of the door body, and then 8. A gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein when the door is opened and detection by the detecting means is not detected, the door is determined to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine 8, after the second locking member moves and the start of the door body opening operation is detected by the detection means, the door body is opened with respect to the frame body, and detection by the detection means is not detected. In this case, the main judgment means and the sub-judgment means judge that the door body has been opened, so that it can be judged that the door body has been opened when the detection state of the detection means has been switched twice. .

  Here, regardless of the switching of the detection means, when the main judgment means and the sub judgment means determine that the door body has been opened according to one detection state, the detection means becomes a detection state due to a failure or the like. Since the main judgment means and the sub-judgment means determine that the door body has been opened, there has been a problem that erroneous determination is likely to occur.

  However, since the main judging means and the sub judging means judge that the door body is opened when the detecting state of the detecting means is switched twice, the door body is opened according to the detection state of 1 regardless of the switching of the detecting means. The occurrence of misjudgment can be reduced compared to the case where it is determined that the operation has been performed.

  In any of the gaming machines 1 to 8, the main control means is mounted on a first board and included in a first board box, and the sub-control means is different from the first board. A gaming machine 9 which is mounted on a second board and is contained in a second board box different from the first board box.

  According to the gaming machine 9, the main control means is mounted on the first board and included in the first board box, and the sub-control means is mounted on the second board different from the first board and the first board. It is included in a second substrate box different from the one substrate box. Therefore, since the main control means and the sub control means are installed in different board boxes, it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of replacing the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

  In the gaming machine 9, the first board box is attached to the frame body, and the second board box is attached to the door body.

  According to the gaming machine 10, since the first board box is attached to the frame body and the second board box is attached to the door body, the positions where the main control means and the sub control means are installed can be separated. it can. Therefore, since it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of an act of exchanging the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

  The output to the outside by the first to third output means is, for example, a sound output by a sound output means such as a speaker provided in a gaming machine, a display output by a display means such as a lamp provided in the gaming machine, a game For example, output of a signal to an external device provided outside the machine.

Note that the transmission means of the gaming machine according to claim 1 corresponds to the process of S211 in FIG. 10 , the output means corresponds to the process of S2615 in FIG. 29, and a part of the hinge member includes a support shaft 25a, The support metal fitting provided with the insertion hole in which the shaft part of 25b is inserted corresponds.
<Others>
For example, as a kind of gaming machine, a medal is inserted and a start lever is operated to rotate a rotating cylinder with a plurality of symbols, and then a stop button is operated to stop the rotating cylinder. There is known a slot machine that gives a predetermined number of medals when a combination of symbols displayed by stopping the spinning cylinder is a predetermined combination.
The slot machine has an outer shape formed by a substantially box-shaped casing (frame body) in which a rotating drum and the like are installed, and a front door (door body) that opens and closes the front surface of the casing. Inside the slot machine, a main control device that performs main control of the game is installed, and medals to be given to the player are stored. Therefore, as one of the purposes to prevent the main control device that performs the main control of the game from being illegally exchanged or the medal being taken out illegally, the front door and the housing are locked with a dedicated key. It has become.
Furthermore, a door detection sensor for detecting that the front door is opened with respect to the housing is provided inside the slot machine, and when the door detection sensor detects that the front door is opened, that fact Some of them notify the outside that the front door is open. By notifying the outside that the front door is open, unauthorized actions such as replacement of the main control device and taking out of medals can be suppressed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-37948). .
However, in a slot machine provided with a door detection sensor that detects that the front door has been opened with respect to the housing, it is possible to notify the outside that the front door has been opened. If the main control device is illegally replaced with a main control device that does not notify even if the door detection sensor detects that the front door has been opened, then it will notify even if the front door is opened. There was a problem that was not made.
In particular, when the illegally exchanged main control device performs illegal control that forcibly generates a special gaming state (so-called jackpot) that gives a player a large gaming value, Since the medals were paid out, there was a problem that the hall suffered great damage.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying the outside that the main control device has been illegally replaced.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is provided in a space formed by a frame, a door that opens and closes the front of the frame, and the door and the frame. A main control means for performing main control of the game; and a sub-control means for performing control according to an instruction from the main control means provided in the space, both of the main control means and the sub-control means. And detecting means for detecting an opening / closing operation of the door body with respect to the frame body, and the main control means opens and closes the door body with respect to the frame body based on a detection result of the detection means. A main judgment means for judging whether or not the door body has been operated; and when the main judgment means judges that the door body has been opened / closed, a door open / close signal based on the opening / closing operation of the door body being sent Transmitting means for transmitting to the control means, and the sub-control The means determines whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body based on the detection result of the detection means, and determines that the door body has been opened / closed by the sub-judging means. In this state, when the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission unit of the main control unit cannot be received, the first output unit outputs the fact to the outside.
The opening / closing operation of the door body detected by the detecting means includes an opening operation for opening the door body with respect to the frame body, a closing operation for closing the door body with respect to the frame body, and the opening operation. It includes at least one of a series of operations in which a closing operation is performed.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the main control means and the sub-control means change information that changes as the door body opens and closes the frame body. Comparison means for comparing the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means with the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means. When the comparison result by the comparison means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means, Second output means for outputting the fact to the outside.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the comparison unit and the second output unit may be included in the main control unit or the sub control unit. Further, a control means different from the main control means or the sub control means may have the comparison means and the second output means.
The change information that changes as the door body closes is, for example, the number of times the door body is closed, or a value that changes irregularly as the door body closes (for example, 111 The next value is a value whose numerical value changes in the order of 3 and the next value is 255 or a random value).
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the sub-control unit is configured such that the sub-determination unit determines that the door body is opened. Is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means, and the sub-opening / closing information storage means stores the closing information of the door body when the sub-determination means determines that the door body has been closed. When the release information is stored, a third output means for outputting the fact to the outside when the game is executed is provided.
Note that the opening or closing operation determined by the sub-determination means is determined when the detection means detects that the door body has actually opened or closed, for example, the detection result by the detection means, When the state changes from off to on to off, or from on to off to on, it may be determined that the operation has been opened or closed.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the frame body is provided with a first locking member for locking the door body, and the door The body has a front end portion positioned on the inner side of the frame body with respect to the first locking member in a state of being closed with respect to the frame body, and a door from the first locking member with being closed with respect to the frame body. A rear end portion located on the body side; a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and in contact with the first locking member; and the groove portion and the first locking member are locked. And a second locking member configured to be movable from a state in which the groove and the first locking member are locked, and the detecting means is provided on the first locking member. The position is different from the position where the second locking member is locked, and is provided within the range in which the second locking member moves.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the main control means is mounted on the first board and included in the first board box. The sub-control means is mounted on a second substrate different from the first substrate, and is included in a second substrate box different from the first substrate box.
The output to the outside by the first to third output means is, for example, a sound output by a sound output means such as a speaker provided in a gaming machine, a display output by a display means such as a lamp provided in the gaming machine, a game For example, output of a signal to an external device provided outside the machine.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the detection means for detecting the opening / closing operation of the door relative to the frame is connected to both the main control means and the sub-control means, and the main control means detects the detection result by the detection means. Based on the above, it is determined by the main determination means whether or not the door body is opened and closed with respect to the frame body. When it is determined by the main judging means that the door body is opened / closed, a door opening / closing signal based on the door body being opened / closed is transmitted to the sub-control means by the transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub-control means, the sub-determination means determines whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame based on the detection result of the detection means, and the door body is opened / closed by the sub-determination means. If the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmission means of the main control means cannot be received in the state determined as described above, the fact is output to the outside by the first output means.
Therefore, it is determined by the main judgment means of the main control means and the sub judgment means of the sub control means whether or not the door body has been opened / closed with respect to the frame body. In the sub control means, the door body is opened and closed by the sub judgment means. When the door opening / closing signal cannot be received from the main control means in the state determined to have been operated, the first output means can output that the door body has been opened / closed.
Therefore, when the main control means is replaced by an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the door opening / closing signal is not transmitted from the main control means, so the door body is opened or closed by the unauthorized person, and the sub-judging means When it is determined that the door body has been opened and closed, there is an effect that the first output means can output that the main control means may have been replaced.
Further, since an outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the first output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the main control means and the sub-control means change as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body. Change information storage means for storing change information to be stored, and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means is compared with the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means. Compared by means. If the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means, the fact is indicated to the second output means. Is output by. Therefore, when the main control means is exchanged for an unauthorized person by an unauthorized person, the change information stored in the respective change information storage means does not correspond, so that the output by the second output means can be performed. effective.
Moreover, since the outside person can recognize that the main control means may have been replaced by an unauthorized one by the output from the second output means, the main control means can be inspected and replaced, There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from being forcibly generated by the exchanged illegal main control means.
Further, since the change information stored in the change information storage means cannot be known without examining the contents of the change information storage means, it is often necessary to know the change information stored in the change information storage means. It will take a long time. Therefore, since it takes a lot of time to prevent the output of the second output means from being performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means with an unauthorized one.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the door body opening information when the sub-judgment means determines that the door body has been opened. And the closing information of the door when it is determined by the sub-determination means that the door is closed is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means, and the opening information is stored in the sub-opening / closing information storage means. When the game is executed, the fact is output to the outside by the third output means.
Here, for example, if the fraudster knows that it is a gaming machine that outputs to the outside that the main control means has been exchanged at the timing of opening and closing the door body, An action is considered in which a game is executed without closing the door body and a special game state is forcibly generated.
However, when the door body is opened and not closed, the opening information is stored in the auxiliary opening / closing information storage means, so that the door remains open even if a game is executed by an unauthorized person. The fact that the game is being executed can be output by the third output means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make an external person recognize at the timing when the game is executed that there is a possibility that the main control means has been replaced by an unauthorized person.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the first locking member provided in the frame body and the door body are provided. The door body is closed with respect to the frame body by engaging the second locking member. The second locking member is closed to the frame body and has a distal end located on the inner side of the frame body than the first locking member, and the door from the first locking member in a state closed to the frame body. It has a rear end portion located on the body side and a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and inscribed by the first locking member, and biased to a state of locking with the first locking member Has been. That is, when the door body is opened, the first locking member and the second locking member cannot be released unless the second locking member is moved. In addition, since the detection means is provided in a position different from the position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member and within the range in which the second locking member moves, the detection means It can be detected that the second locking member has started to move. Therefore, since the detection means detects that the second locking member that operates without fail when the door is opened, it is possible to reliably detect that the door is opened.
Also, when the door body is closed from the opened state, the second locking member is detected by the detecting means, and then the first locking member and the second locking member are locked. Therefore, even if the supply of power is cut off and the main control means is illegally replaced, when the power is supplied and the door is closed to play a game, the output is made by the first or second output means. . Accordingly, it is possible to reliably output that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one, and to make it possible to recognize the possibility that the main control means has been replaced with an unauthorized one by the output. There is.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the main control means is mounted on the first board and the first board box The sub-control means is mounted on a second substrate different from the first substrate and included in a second substrate box different from the first substrate box. Therefore, since the main control means and the sub control means are installed in different board boxes, it takes a long time to replace both the main control means and the sub control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the act of replacing the main control means and the sub control means with an unauthorized one.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
11 Case (frame)
12 Front door (door)
22鉤金tool 22a tip 22b rear end 22d groove 23 supporting metal member 24 door detection sensor
25a Support shaft (part of hinge member)
25b Support shaft (part of hinge member)
26 door opening sensors 111 display control unit (sub-control means)
131 Main control device (main control means)
153e opening and closing number of times counter 153f last door opening and closing flag 153g this door opening and closing flag 186c command check timer 186e last door opening and closing flag 186f this door opening and closing flag 186g opening and closing number of times counter 1024 door detection sensor
3001 1st hinge member (a part of detection means)
3002 Second hinge member (part of detection means)
3011 Support shaft (part of detection means)
3012 electrode (part of detection means , first electrode )
3021 Insertion hole (part of detection means, inserted part)
3022 electrode (part of detection means , second electrode )

Claims (5)

A frame body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the frame body, a main control means that is provided in a space formed by the door body and the frame body and that performs main control of the game, and is provided in the space In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means for performing control according to an instruction from the main control means,
The detection unit is connected to both the main control unit and the sub control unit, and detects an opening / closing operation of the door body with respect to the frame body,
The main control means includes
Main judgment means for judging whether or not the door body is opened and closed with respect to the frame body based on a detection result of the detection means;
A transmission means for transmitting a door opening / closing signal based on the opening / closing operation of the door body to the sub-control means when the main determination means determines that the door body has been opened / closed;
The sub-control means is
Sub-determination means for determining whether or not the door body has been opened and closed with respect to the frame body based on the detection result of the detection means;
A first output that outputs the fact to the outside when the door opening / closing signal transmitted by the transmitting means of the main control means cannot be received in a state where the door body is determined to be opened / closed by the sub-determining means. And a gaming machine. The main control means and the sub control means respectively include change information storage means for storing change information that changes as the door body opens and closes with respect to the frame body.
Comparison means for comparing change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means with change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub-control means;
When the comparison result by the comparison means does not correspond to the change information stored in the change information storage means of the main control means and the change information stored in the change information storage means of the sub control means The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a second output means for outputting the above to the outside. The sub-control means is
When the sub-determination means determines that the door body is opened, the door body opening information is stored. On the other hand, when the sub-determination means determines that the door body is closed, the door body is stored. Sub-opening / closing information storage means for storing the closing information of
3. A third output means for outputting a message to the outside when a game is executed when the opening information is stored in the auxiliary opening / closing information storage means. 2. The gaming machine according to 2. The frame body is provided with a first locking member for locking the door body,
The door body includes a front end portion positioned on the inner side of the frame body with respect to the first locking member in a state of being closed with respect to the frame body, and the first locking member in a state of being closed with respect to the frame body. A rear end portion located closer to the door body, and a groove portion provided between the rear end portion and the front end portion and inscribed by the first locking member. The groove portion and the first locking member are engaged with each other. A second locking member configured to be movable from a state in which the groove and the first locking member are biased to be stopped is provided;
The detection means is provided at a position different from a position where the second locking member is locked to the first locking member and within a range in which the second locking member moves. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that: The main control means is mounted on the first substrate and included in the first substrate box,
2. The sub-control unit is mounted on a second substrate different from the first substrate, and is included in a second substrate box different from the first substrate box. The gaming machine according to any one of 4 to 4.

Images